52‘s.
.
,
9157‘ 6’“ El
\
\
MICHIGAN STATE UNIVERSITY AR ES
H m lllll’llHilllliii rim
ll
3 1293 00562 9310
ll
This is to certify that the
dissertation entitled
AN INVESTIGATION OF THE CONDITIONS AFFECTING
THE TEACHING OF COMPOSITION IN AN INNER-CITY
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL, GRADES KINDERGARTEN
THROUGH THREE: A DESCRIPTIVE STUDY
presented by
Shirley Mae Holmes
has been accepted towards fulfillment
ofthe requirements for
Ph.D. Teacher Education
degree in
% .
Major prof
[hue October 20, 1988
MSU is an Affirmative Action/Equal Opportunity Institution 0-12771
lIBRARY
Michigan State
University l
'u.“» ”
a“- *h“ 4..
AN INVESTIGATION OF THE CONDITIONS AFFECTING
THE TEACHING OF COMPOSITION IN AN INNER-CITY
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL, GRADES KINDERGARTEN
THROUGH THREE: A DESCRIPTIVE STUDY
BY
Shirley Mae Holmes
A DISSERTATION
Submitted to
Michigan State University
in partial fulfillment of the requirements
for the degree of
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Department of Teacher Education
1988
U\
U)
ABSTRACT
AN INVESTIGATION OF THE CONDITIONS AFFECTING
THE TEACHING OF COMPOSITION IN AN INNER-CITY
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL, GRADES KINDERGARTEN
THROUGH THREE: A DESCRIPTIVE STUDY
BY
Shirley Mae Holmes
The purpose of this study was to examine the writing
program for primary-grade children in an inner-city school
and to observe what problems, supports,- and constraints
existed that influenced, facilitated, and/or impeded the
composition component of the language arts curriculum as
delivered in that school. The four central research
questions addressed in this study were:
ls What problems do inner-city children face in
learning to write?
2. What problems in teaching writing do teachers
face in an inner-city school?
3. What supports exist for teaching writing in the
primary grades in this inner-city school?
4. What constraints exist for teaching writing in
the primary grades in this inner-city school?
Shirley Mae Holmes
The writer sought to answer these questions by
applying the 15 key factors for effective writing
instruction identified by Farr and Daniels in Wage
Diversity and Writing instruction (1986). The 15 factors
provided the conceptual or theoretical framework for the
study.
This research was descriptive in nature, as opposed
to testing hypotheses. The first section of the
study involved gathering and analyzing national, state,
and local school documents on writing. The remainder of
the project involved observing five primary-grade
classrooms, grades kindergarten through three. Data
sources included field notes, classroom observation
datalogs, interviews, questionnaires, writing samples, and
other school artifacts.
The major findings include the “following: (a)
writing as a process of composing an original thought was
not emphasized; (b) the teacher and pupils perceived the
practice of handwriting, both manuscript and cursive, as
writing; (c) any paper on which words were written was
perceived as writing; (d) the use of textbooks and
worksheets dominated the writing curriculum; and (e)
teachers evidenced a general lack of knowledge about the
latest research in teaching composition.
Shirley Mae Holmes
The researcher concluded that the socioeconomic
status of the pupils had far less bearing on the status of
the writing program than did the fact that the writing
program did not comply with the latest research about the
factors that constitute effective writing instruction.
Copyright by
SHIRLEY MAE HOLMES
1988
Dedicated to God; my daughter, Kimberley Anne Holmes;
and my son, Marc Devereaux Holmes.
vi
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I wish to express my heartfelt thanks and deepest
gratitude to the persons most responsible for the
completion of this research project and doctoral
dissertation. Without, the support, encouragement,
assistance, and expertise of the following individuals,
this study would not have been possible.
The central-office administrators of the local school
district graciously granted permission for me to conduct
the study. The principal cooperated fully with the
project, and the participating teachers and their students
were very cooperative and indispensable during the
classroom observation phase of the study.
Dr. Sheila Fitzgerald, guidance committee
chairperson, dissertation director, and major advisor,
provided expert advice and many helpful suggestions. She
committed numerous hours to the development and completion
of this study. Her guidance was indispensable.
Dr. James Anderson provided encouragement and was
instrumental in helping me keep this study within
manageable limits. His professional expertise through the
years has been very helpful.
vii
Dr. Charles Blackman was very supportive, giving me
encouragement whenever needed. His creative insight is
greatly appreciated.
Dr. Arden Moon contributed greatly to the completion
of this study. His professional suppdrt and generous,
insightful comments were very helpful.
. Dr. Louis Romano also helped me limit the scope of
the research project at the outset of this study and thus
provided me with the impetus for my next research project.
My children, Kimberley iAnne Holmes and JMarc
Devereaux Holmes, sustained me with faith and love during
this major stage of my life. Their tolerance and
encouragement also enabled me to complete this endeavor
successfully.
I am deeply grateful to Susan Cooley for her
expertise in editing and typing this manuscript. She
provided valuable insight and helpful comments.
Finally, I am indebted to the many teachers and
professors who have instructed me and the many other
individuals who were supportive through the years. My
sincere thanks extend to everyone, and may God bless and
keep each one of you in His care.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF APPENDICES O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0
Chapter
I.
II.
III.
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background of the Study . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the Study . . . . . . . . .
Research Questions . . . . . . . . . .
Importance of and Rationale for the
Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delimitations of the Study and General-
izability of the Research Findings .
Definitions of Key Terms . . . . . . .
Summary and Overview . . . . . . . . .
REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Writing Development of Young
Children 0 O O O O I I O O O O O 0
Writing in the Inner-City School . . .
summary 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0
DESIGN AND METHODOLOGY . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . .
Definitions of a Descriptive Study
Demographic Characteristics of the
Study Setting . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of the Attendance Center
Description of the School Setting
Selection of the Participants . . .
The Research Instruments . .
The Questionnaires . . . .
Interviews . . . . .
Methods of Data Collection .
ix
Page
xii
xiii
U'IU'IH H
0‘
57
57
57
59
60
64
65
67
67
68
7O
IV.
Documents .
Personnel
Summary .
Introduction
Analysis of Collected
State Curriculum Guide for Writing
District Curriculum Guidelines for
Composition .
State-Mandated Tests . .
District-Mandated Tests .
Commercial Materials Provided by the
District
Commercial Materials Provided by the
Teacher .
Materials Made by the Teacher .
Analysis of Questionnaire Data
Composite of Administrators’ Question-
naire Data
ANALYSIS OF THE DATA . . . .
Teacher Questionnaires .
Student Questionnaires .
Analysis of Oral Interview Data .
Composite of Administrator Interview
Data
Teacher Interviews . . .
Student Interviews . . .
Analysis of Classroom Observation Data
as Corroborated
Associated With
Instruction .
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Summary .
Omdmmbwwlfl
10
11
12
13
14
15
by the 15
Effective
Key Factors
Writing
Documents
Page
70
72
8O
81
81
81
81
83
87
88
88
89
95
99
99
106
110
115
115
120
124
126
126
128
138
139
141
145
145
146
146
147
148
148
148
149
149
150
Page
V. SUMMARY, FINDINGS, CONCLUSIONS, IMPLICA-
TIONS, AND RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . 152
Summary of the Study . . . . . . . . . . 152
Findings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Research Question 1 . . . . . . . . . . 154
Research Question 2 . . . . . . . . . . 160
Research Question 3 . . . . . . . . . . 163
Research Question 4 . . . . . . . . . . 172
Other Findings . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Implications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Suggested Areas for Further Study . . . . 188
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1. Number of Students Per Classroom . . . . . . 66
2. Overview of Participating Teachers . . . . . 107
3. Designations of Pupil Participants . . . . . 110
4. Pupils’ Responses to Item 5: "How often
do you write at school?" . . . . . . . . . 112
5. Pupils’ Responses to Item 6: "How often
do you write at home?" . . . . . . . . . . 112
6. Pupils’ Responses to Item 12: "Do you
read at school? When?" . . . . . . . . . 114
7. Fifteen Factors Checklist: Teachers’
Perceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8. Number of Different Writing Samples . . . . 132
xii
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX Page
A. CORRESPONDENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
B. QUESTIONNAIRES, INTERVIEW FORMATS,
PARENTAL CONSENT FORMS, AND TEACHER
VOLUNTEER-PARTICIPANT LETTER . . . . . . 191
C. STATE DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
D. LOCAL SCHOOL DISTRICT DOCUMENTS . . . . . . 221
E. DIAGRAMS OF CLASSROOMS . . . . . . . . . . 252
F. SAMPLES OF CHILDREN’S WRITING, BY
GRADE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
G. CLASSROOM VISITATION CALENDAR . . . . . . . 319
H. CHECKLIST OF THE FIFTEEN FACTORS
ASSOCIATED WITH EFFECTIVE WRITING
INSTRUCTION (FARR & DANIELS, 1986) . . . 320
I. SUBJECT SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
J. SCHOOL LIBRARY SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . 323
K. "BATTLE OF THE BOOKS" REPORT FORM . . . . . 324
L. SAMPLE FIELD NOTES FROM RESEARCHER
JOURNALS: FIVE PARTICIPATING
CLASSROOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
M O BUSY BOOK 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 3 3 o
N. Aa TO Zz FACSIMILE . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
xiii
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
gagkground of ghe sgudy
Writing is an important skill for everyone,
particularly minority students. The ability to compose
also necessitates an ability to think clearly, rationally,
and coherently. To develop and enhance this essential
skill, all students need time for writing. However,
minority or nonmainstream children are the main ones who
are deprived of writing time. Smith (1984) stated:
Right now in many elementary schools, the children
who need 'opportunities to write the most for
linguistic development, for cognitive development,
and for literary learning, are seldom given
opportunities to write. This includes all children
in grades kindergarten through three, children in
minority groups, the children of the poor, and
children assigned to low or remedial classes. (p. 34)
The issue of illiteracy in America has been discussed
at length during the past several years. However,
although it is important to remember that illiteracy is
prevalent throughout American society, it is the
nonmainstream segments of the population who are affected
the most--namely, children in the urban areas of medium-
sized and large cities. Children in these attendance
areas have the lowest literacy levels in the country.
Logically, then, if educators are to increase the rate of
literacy in America, they should start with these pupils.
The importance of writing as it relates to literacy
has been documented (Calkins, 1983, 1986; Clay, 1975:
Graves, 1983: Murray, 1968: Tway, 1985). IReading' and
writing are closely intertwined, and as pupils become more
proficient in one of these skills, their proficiency in
the other often increases. Because nonmainstream pupils
have the most difficulty gaining literacy and need the
most help, it seems logical that administrators, teachers,
and other education personnel should concentrate on
teaching composition to these children. Attention should
be given to identifying pertinent factors that may aid or
hinder the writing program for these youngsters.
Teachers in inner-city schools face many challenges.
The job of teaching is a difficult one, at best. But,
coupled. with. the. environmental, cultural, and societal
problems associated with many inner-city schools, the task
of teaching becomes monumental. Thus, researchers also
must examine the conditions affecting the teaching of
writing from the teachers’ viewpoint.
Inner-city children face many problems as they
participate in their daily educational activities. Some
of’ these jproblems stem from social, cultural, and
environmental factors beyond their control. Other
academic difficulties are caused by mainstream educators’
/\
resistance to the validity of their dialect. Smitherman
(1977), Labov (1968), and others have attested to the fact
that nonmainstream dialects have definite systems of
linguistic rules. Use of a dialect can be a factor in the
rate at which a child acquires written literacy, but it
need not be a deterrent for the young child unless his/her
teacher views it as such (Heath, 1983: Markham, 1984;
Smitherman, 1977, 1981).
Educators are charged with the responsibility of
teaching composition skills, not just to mainstream pupils
but also to those who are socially, linguistically, and
culturally' different. Darnell (1974) listed. three
techniques teachers can use in helping nonmainstream
pupils develop literacy:
1. Adopt a warm, positive attitude toward the
pupils’ unique cultural differences.
2. Use the children’s rich cultural experiences as a
base on which to develop literacy.
3. Select curriculum materials with which the pupils
can identify.
Recent researchers have built on this theme. Farr
and Daniels (1986) isolated 15 key factors associated with
effective writing instruction for linguistically different
children. These factors are as follows:
12.
13.
14.
15.
Teachers who understand and appreciate the basic
linguistic competence that students bring with
them to school, and who therefOre have positive
expectations for students’ achievements in
writing.
Regular and substantial practice in writing,
aimed at developing fluency.
The opportunity to write for real, personally
significant purposes.
Experience in writing for a wide range of audi-
ences, both inside and outside of school.
Rich and continuous reading experience, including
both published literature of acknowledged merit
and the work of peers and instructors.
Exposure to models of writing in process and
writers at work, including both teachers and
classmates.
Instruction in the processes of writing: that is,
learning to work at a given writing task in
appropriate phases, including prewriting,
drafting, and revising.
Collaborative activities for students that pro-
vide ideas for writing and guidance for revising
works in progress.
One-to-one writing conferences with the teacher.
Direct instruction in specific strategies and
techniques for writing.
Reduced instruction in. grammatical terminology
and related drills, with increased use of
sentence-combining activities.
Teaching of writing mechanics and grammar in the
context of students’ actual compositions, rather
than in separate drills or exercises.
Moderate marking of surface-structure errors,
focusing on sets or patterns of related errors.
Flexible and cumulative evaluation of student
writing that stresses revision and is sensitive
to variations in subject, audience, and purpose.
Practicing and using writing as a tool of learn-
ing in all subjects in the curriculum, not just
in English. (pp. 45-46)
According to Farr and Daniels, using these principles
properly should enable teachers to enhance their pupils’
progress in composition literacy.
EQIQOSB O: the Study
The purpose of this study was to examine the writing
program for primary-grade children in an inner-city school
and to observe what problems, supports, and constraints
existed that influenced, facilitated, and/or impeded the
composition component of the language arts curriculum as
delivered in that school.
Research Questions
The four central research questions addressed in this
study were:
1. What problems do inner-city children face in
learning to write?
2. What problems in teaching writing do teachers
face in an innerfcity school?
3. What supports exist for teaching writing in the
primary grades in this inner-city school?
4. What constraints exist for teaching writing in
the primary grades in this inner-city school?
The writer sought to answer these questions by
applying the 15 key factors for effective writing
instruction identified by Farr and Daniels in Language
WW (1986)- The 15 factors
provided the conceptual or theoretical framework for the
study.
o a e and a i o e u
The data generated in this study may be useful not
only to teachers of composition and, consequently, their
pupils, but also to other educators in the school system.
Principals, language arts supervisors, directors of
curriculum and instruction, assistant superintendents in
charge, of instruction, and. board of education. members
should find the results of this research helpful as they
continue to search for methods to improve the writing
program and general education of the-pupils in their
charge.
More research is needed on the status of the writing
curriculum and the composition process in inner-city
schools. It is hoped the present study will help
alleviate that need. Clark and Florio (1982) addressed
the need for such research in a study they conducted for
the Institute for Research on Teaching at Michigan State
University:
The first suggestion for further research is a call
for more thick description of children’s writing in
context. Before the field can put together the
beginnings of a developmental picture of the acquisi-
tion of written literacy, we need, to document the
teaching of writing at grade levels other than
second, third, and sixth. Other potentially impor-
tant setting differences include bilingual classes,
inner-city schools, and special teacher training and
background. (pp. 192-93)
Nonmainstream pupils have special needs that
educators must address as they work with these youngsters.
This is true in all curricular areas, not just in
composition. Therefore, one of the more important
aspects of this study is that it may add to the body of
literature about the need to accept the rich linguistic
backgrounds nonmainstream students bring with them when
they enter the formal education scene. Teachers can use
this diversity to build a foundation to help inner-city
children gain oral as well as written. literacy in the
major dialect.
In reviewing the related literature, no study was
found that examined the primary-grade writing program of a
school, especially one in an area known to have many
educationally and culturally disadvantaged students. Tb
this end, the writer chose to do a descriptive study that
would allow her to observe the conditions that affect the
teaching of composition in an urban school.
Delimitatigns of the Study and Generalizability
of the Research Findings
The classroom-observation component of the study was
delimited to approximately one month. The research was
further confined to an analysis of the writing program of
the primary grades (K—3) in one elementary school located
in the inner-city area of a medium-sized urban school
district in Michigan.
Because an inner-city school was scrutinized, the
findings and results generated from this investigation
may not be applicable to rural or suburban attendance
centers and not necessarily to any other school.
Definitions of Key Terms
The following terms are defined in the context in
which they are used in this dissertation.
Compositionlwriting. Composing or writing is:
the process of selecting, developing, and arranging
ideas effectively. The process requires students to
write in a variety of forms (e.g. letters, poems,
stories) for a variety of purposes (e.g. to inform,
to persuade, to describe, to entertain), and for a
variety of audiences (e.g. peers, teachers, parents).
(Michigan Department of Education and Michigan
Council of Teachers of English, 1983, p. 1)
Graves (1973) defined composition as "any writing intended
to be at least a sentence unit that was completely
composed by the child" (p. 33). Similarly, Calkins (1986)
described composition as "an act of composing meaning"
(p. 144). Carlson (1970) viewed writing as a "total act
of expression" (p. vii), and Good defined creative writing
as "original prose or poetry composed by children and
young people" (p. 653). According to Stewig et a1.
(1974):
In creative writing, children are asked to make up,
invent, devise, originate, or in some other way
respond to a stimulus. The response may be a poem, a
short story, a descriptive paragraph, or a play. The
important element is that the child encounters the
motivation and using his own ideas, builds upon it.
(pp. 193-94)
e - ' o . An inner-city school is "an
attendance center whose students are mainly children of
the urban poor, largely black and minority children"
(Riessman, 1976, p. 1). Good (1973) defined an inner-city
school as:
technically, any school located in a long-established
city as opposed to being in one of the newer
surrounding suburban school systems: in practice the
term is used only for those schools within the city
located in predominantly low socioeconomic areas. (p.
302)
Language arts curricuig . Huenecke (1974) wrote
that:
The 'term "language arts" includes the primary
communication skills of reading, spelling, and
speaking, as well as such unifying skills as creative
writing, drama, and interpretive listening. (p. 29)
Good (1973) defined language arts as:
a group of school subjects, the chief purpose of
which is to teach control and proficiency in the use
of the English language: commonly includes reading,
language (oral and written), speech, spelling and
handwriting. (p. 328)
Moffett (1983) offered the following definition of
language arts:
Defined by communication concepts, language arts is a
set of two productive and two receptive activities--
speaking and writing, reading and listening--one pair
for the verbalization of experience (comprehension
and composition) and the other pair for the
transcription of speech (literacy). (p. 13)
W. An effective writing program has
the following components: "emphasis on practice and
process in writing, inservice programs, school-wide
10
emphasis, and administrative support" (Holbrook, 1984,
p. 2).
Summary and Overview
Chapter I contained an introduction to the nature of
the problem of writing as it relates to inner-city school
children. The purpose and importance of the study were
discussed, as were the delimitations and generalizability
of the research findings. Research questions posed in the
study were stated, and definitions of key terms were
given.
Chapter II is a comprehensive review of the
literature on two main topics: (a) the writing
development of young children and (b) writing in the
inner-city school.
The methodology used in this study is explained in
Chapter III. The two major sources from which data were
gathered-~personne1 and. documents--are discussed in
detail.
Chapter IV contains an analysis of the data gathered
in the study. The data analysis is divided into four
parts: (a) analysis of pertinent documents, (b) analysis
of questionnaire responses, (c) analysis of interview
responses, and (d) analysis of classroom-observation data
as correlated with the 15 key factors associated with
effective writing instruction (Farr & Daniels, 1986).
11
Chapter V includes a summary of the research findings
and the conclusions drawn from those findings. Possible
implications of the study are addressed. Recommendations
for practice and for further research are also given.
CHAPTER II
REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE
W
Chapter II contains a review of the literature
pertinent to this study. The material is presented in two
sections. Section one is a review of literature on the
writing development of young children in general. In
section two, literature related to the young black writer
in an inner-city school is reviewed.
The Writing Development of Young Chiidren
The young child enters school with many linguistic
skills that are then transferred to the more complex skill
of writing or composition. Young children have been
surrounded by language since birth and have become quite
skilled users of language by the time they begin school
(Mellon, 1981). Read (1971) and Bissex (1980) documented
the child’s acquisition and use of language in natural
contexts. From the beginning of their lives, children
hear language being used naturally. Consequently, the
first stage in the development of literacy is listening,
followed by speaking, reading, and writing (Lundsteen,
1979).
12
13
Lundsteen (1979) defined listening as the process by
which spoken language "is converted to meaning in the
mind" (p. 1). Young children first follow this process
and then attempt to put these sounds on paper. Lundsteen
addressed the commonalities between listening and writing.
She *wrote. of "the internal listening that accompanies
writing and the already mentioned common background,
including vocabulary" (p. 14). The ability to use vivid
words to describe sounds he/she hears is important in a
young child’s writing development. Lundsteen quoted
several studies (Cooper, 1965: Heider' & Heider, 1940:
Ratliff, 1971) showing the negative effects of deafness on
children’s writing ability. These studies revealed that
"compositions of the deaf, which show less unity in style,
less variety, and less use of probability, resemble those
of hearing children about three years younger" (p. 14).
Children are spoken to in their homes and are
actively encouraged by their parents as they make their
first utterances. They begin to associate speech with
print early in their literacy development. Researchers
have shown a positive relationship between a child’s being
read to and his/her development in written language.
Sutherland, Monson, and Arbuthnot (1981) wrote:
Parents, teachers, librarians, baby-sitters, all of
us who work with children, can enrich our lives as
well as those of children when we provide and
encourage delight in hearing a good story read aloud
well. Pleasurable experience in listening can create
14
interest in books that carries on through years of
adolescence and adulthood. Listening can also
provide natural opportunities for development of a
listening vocabulary and acquaintance with English
syntax. When you read to children, you give them a
chance to hear an author’s style, to identify with
well-developed characters, and sometimes to try to
predict the direction the plot will take in
tomorrow’s installment. Most important of all, you
help them to know good books and poems in a relaxed
warm atmosphere. (p. 516)
Cianciolo (1981) spoke of the importance of
selecting:
well-written, imaginatively illustrated picture
books that are of interest to children of all ages
and backgrounds. . . . Picture books which will
provide children with enjoyable, informative, and
discriminating literary experiences, foster the habit
of reading, and initiate an appreciation for and an
understanding of the beautiful and creative in the
graphic arts. (p. xiv)
Children need to hear the power of words and
experience the images that these words inspire. From
these oral/aural experiences, young beginning writers can
expand their knowledge about literacy. Graves ( 1983)
wrote that:
Reading different authors aloud also provides
different voices and topics for the children to
sample. The objective is not to have the child write
and illustrate like Robert McCloskey, Beatrix Potter,
or Marguerite Henry. Rather, the objective is to
enjoy the plots, the fantasies, the taste of words,
to be stimulated by the drama of events. The
children may try some of the author’s forms of
expression, ways of illustrating. Fine, but it is
their choice. Often the children don’t know they are
using elements from literature. Since they have a
strong sense of story and drama, and have heard the
rich voices in the writing, they have the urge to
produce literature. Children do this in many areas
of their lives: they watch the dribbling and strong
headers of the soccer pros and rush to the playground
15
to experiment. An adventure drama sends them
exploring the fields and woodlands, claiming the land
for king and queen. It becomes theirs because they
choose and experiment on their own. Once again,
climate and tone are provided by the teacher’s
reading, and the children’s reading and sampling of
literature written for them. (pp. 29-30)
Moffett and Wagner (1983) stressed the importance of
reading orally to children. In the third edition of their
text, under the category "Listening to Texts," they wrote:
Long before they are able to decode or read aloud
themselves, children should hear good oral
presentations of all kinds of literature that bring
out the rhythm, music, imagery, and sound play of
poetry and serve as a model of good speech
articulation. Love of language is first fostered
through the ear, not the eye, and from infancy onward
children need to be fed good literature. Since young
children or reluctant readers of any age are
introduced to a very high proportion of their working
vocabulary through oral rather than reading
experience, listening to oral readings of literature
is a very effective way to ease them into the
vocabulary development that will make the reading
process easier. (p. 154)
Because reading and writing are interrelated,the writing
process will also be easier.
The "Lap Method Approach" (Moffett & Wagner, 1983) is
a good means of fostering the young child’s written
literacy and language development. The authors described
this method as one that emphasizes sentence continuity
by having the child follow a text ”with the eyes while
hearing the text read aloud" (p. 417). Moffett and Wagner
described he actual process of the lap method as follows:
What happens when a person follows a text while
hearing it read is that she matches off speech with
print very grossly at first and then more and more
16
finely. Gradually she analyzes the big blocks of
print, discriminates among the different words, and
narrows her synchronizing focus down more and more--
from the whole page or paragraph to the sentence,
then to the phrase or word, then eventually to each
of the forty-odd phonemes of English. (p. 427)
The lap method has its beginnings in the home, when a
parent holds a child on his/her lap and reads aloud to the
child while the youngster follows the text with his/her
eyes. Fitzgerald (n.d.) wrote, "The lap method helps the
child experience joy in reading with someone he loves: it
gives the auditory and visual stimuli that connect print
to what he knows, speech" (p. 3).
Besides imitating the speech and oral patterns they
hear, children make generalizations about language and
internalize rudimentary rules of the language system. As
Bissex (1985) 'noted, "children. spend several years
learning about print before they enter first grade" (p.
103). Educators can assess the extent of this early
knowledge and provide experiences to build on this
existing literary foundation.
Farr (1984) pointed out that young children’s writing
development does not occur in successive, discrete, age-
related stages. Written literacy is acquired holistically
as children experiment with language daily. They
constantly process the data they receive from their
environment and employ this information in much the same
way adults do. According to Farr, "writing should be seen
17
as a precess, and it should be seen as a natural part of
ia_n_gpege, and not as an artificial extension of ’real’
(i.e., oral) language" (p. 128).
Harste, Burke, and Woodward (1984) studied young
children between the ages of three and six to learn about
their acquisition of written language. Using the "child
as informant" technique, they found that educators can
learn much about children’s written literacy by observing
young children in natural language-usage settings. In
addition to substantiating other researchers’ finding that
children have the beginnings of literacy before they enter
the formal school setting, the authors identified eight
key concepts that they perceived to be essential in
understanding children’s literacy and literacy learning.
These concepts' are: "organization, _ intentionality,
generation, risk, social action, context, text, and
demonstration" (p. 81). Harste et al.’s explanations of
these concepts are given in the following paragraphs.
1. W.
Patterns in children’s reading and writing behaviors
which seem to reflect, in their genesis, a common set
of cognitive processing decisions on the part of the
language user and learner. For example, we found
that when asked to write, young children make
markings which reflect the written language of their
culture. We interpret these data to mean that the
psycholinguistic processes in written language use
and learning are sociologically rooted. These data
support the notion that young children are written
language users and learners long before they receive
18
formal instruction and that they actively attend to
written language: in short, there is literacy before
schooling. (p. 82)
2. W-
An expectation on the part of language users and
learners that written marks are cultural objects, or
signs, which signify. Even before children have
determined what a particular written mark may sig-
nify, their responses reflect a basic understanding
of written marks as cultural objects which have a
sign potential. (p. 108)
3. n V S.
In use, language is an open system which permits the
maintenance and generation of meaning. To say that
written language is an object which functions as a
sign is to suggest that the system is infinitely
open. What the language user takes the sign to mean
is a function of his or her purpose and background of
experience. Language as a sign can sign different
things to different people, or even different things
to the same person on different occasions. (p. 118)
4. nisr Taking.
Language is inherently social. Because the trail of
marks we leave during the writing process makes
language users vulnerable, engagement in the process
can scare both participants and observers. When this
happens, withdrawal from the process can occur.
Since access to the process can only be gained
through involvement in the process, strategies which
allow language users to set aside perceived or real
constraints and which permit engagement on the
language user’s terms are central to growth in
literacy. (p. 130)
Without risk there can be no exploration or
discovery of the generative potentials of literacy.
(p. 192)
5. W.
Language is, by its very nature, social. Not only do
writers assume they have readers, and speakers assume
they have listeners, but interaction with real or
supposed social others involving all of the
19
expressions of language is an integral part of
any instance of the language and the language
learning process. (p. 193)
6. gontexr.
The language process does not function unless or
until a language user imposes context. To fail to
contextualize is to fail to understand. There is no
such thing as decontextualized print. Linguistic
signs exist only in a social cognitive setting. (p.
151)
7- M-
From a cognitive processing perspective the basic
unit of language is "text." "Text" presupposes a
reader or a writer actively involved in making a
unified chunk of meaning from experiences involving
language. (p. 164).
In the production of signifying structures in
order to mean in writing, a surface text is created.
This surface text is different from the real text
which remains in the head of the originator. When
someone else reads this surface text in search of
signifying structures and interprets their signifi-
cance, a new text is born. (p. 194)
8. Demonstrations
By "demonstration" we mean a display of how something
is done. As applied to written language and written
language learning, any literary event provides a
variety of demonstrations which are available to
language learners through the actions of the
participants and the artifacts of the process.
The learning of these demonstrations involves the
active mediation of the language user. (p. 180)
Two earlier writers reached conclusions similar to
those of more recent researchers on the writing
development of young children. Hildreth (1936) traced
writing growth in children from the ages of three to six.
Her work "defined five stages ranging from aimless
scribbles to well-marked units closely approximating
20
actual letters" (p. 243). A similar study by Wheeler
(1971) found. that. children’s ‘writing followed. this
progression: "designs, pictures, letters, words in
isolation, word phrases, words in sentences, and finally
symbols" (p. 244). The children in both of these studies
had received no formal writing instruction; they had
taught themselves. These studies and others were reported
by King and Rentel (1979).
The American society is print oriented. Young
children are snrrounded by print. Before they begin their
formal schooling, they are aware of printed forms and soon
learn that "those funny little marks" on signs, cereal
boxes, fast-food logos, book and magazine pages, and so
on, stand for something. Preschoolers are so eager to
learn that they begin to imitate the printed forms by
making "letters/words" of their own. To the adult, this
"writing" is simply scribbling. Hewever, it has meaning
to and can be "read" by the young writer, who anticipates
that the adults in his/her environment can "read" the
message, too.
One of the earliest documented case'studies about the
young child’s development of written literacy was done by
Scollen and Scollen (1981) with their two-year-old
daughter, Rachel. In this study of emergent literacy of
preschool children, the writers found that Rachel
progressed from orally telling her experiences to
21
"writing" them down and "reading" them aloud. She fully
expected that her ”writing" had meaning. This finding was
further documented by Clay (1975), who found that children
expect adults to be able to "read" what they have
"written" (i.e., scribbles). In her work with five-year-
old children, Clay noticed the following steps in the
writing development of young children: scribbling,
tracing over a teacher’s copy, copying underneath the
model, and writing down one’s own ideas without a copy.
The child progresses from knowing that letters represent
sounds and writing these letters, to writing words, then
short phrases, and finally complete sentences.
More specifically, Clay listed the different stages
of written language of which young writers must be aware
as they develop their written literacy:
1. To understand that print talks.
2. To form letters.
3. To build up memories of common words they can
construct out of letters.
4. To use those words to write messages.
5. To increase the number and range of sentences
used.
6. To become flexible in the use of sentences.
7. To discipline the expression of ideas within the
spelling and punctuation conventions of English.
(pp. 11-12)
Clay cited 13 principles and concepts that children
learn as they develop written literacy. Those principles
and concepts, along with a brief description of each one,
are as follows:
22
l. The Sign Concept-~Although realizing that "a sign
carries a message," children have problems when they "fail
to move beyond the stage of producing signs" (p. 63).
2. The Message Concept--"The child at this stage
realizes that the messages that he speaks can be
written down" (p. 63).
3. The Copying Principle--”Some letters, some words,
and some word groups must be imitated or copied in a slow
and laborious way to establish the first units of printing
behavior" (p. 63).
4. The Flexibility Principle--"Left to experiment
with letter forms, children will create a variety of new
symbols by repositioning or decorating the standard forms"
(p. 63).
5. The Inventory Principle--Five-year-old children
"took stock of their own learning so systematically that
they spontaneously made lists of what they knew" and
"arranged or consciously ordered their learning" in
structured inventories (p. 64).
6. The Recurring Principle--"The tendency to repeat
an action has the obvious advantage of helping in the
establishment of quick, habitual response patterns, and it
probably produces pleasant feelings of competence" (p.
64).
7. The Generating Principle--An easy way to extend
one’ s repertoire is to know some elements, and to know
23
some rules for combining or arranging these elements. One
can then produce many new statements in an inventive way"
(p. 64).
8. The Directional Principle--"Language is written
in two-dimensional space according to a set of printer’s
conventions which the adult writer or reader takes for
granted. For correct behaviour to occur the child must
start at the top left, move from left to right, and return
to a left hand position under the starting point,
establishing a top to bottom progression" (p. 64).
9. Reversing the Directional Pattern--"It is common
to find mirror writing at this stage . . . because the
child has selected a starting point towards the right-hand
edge of the page" (p. 65).
10. The Contrastive Principle--"It is a feature of
language that contrasts can be made between units at
several levels . . . --contrasts between shapes, meanings,
sounds, and word patterns" (p. 65).
11. The Space Concept--When a young child progresses
"from writing single words to writing words in groups,"
he/she may have a problem realizing that "a space must be
used to signal the end of one word and the beginning of
another" (p. 65).
12. Page and Book Arrangement--Wh‘en a child "runs
out of page and cannot fit his word or sentence on the
24
line or on a page . . . he tends to fill the left-over
spaces with his left-over utterances, ignoring at that
moment the directional principles" (p. 65).
13. The Abbreviation Principle--"It is an important
and advanced achievement because the child who
intentionally uses an abbreviation probably understands
that the letters of abbreviations ’stand for’ words and
could be filled out or expanded into full forms. letter
and word concepts are established and their
interrelationships understood" (p. 65).
Ames, Gillespie, Haines, and Ilg (1979) listed the
developmental stages in the young child’s ability to copy
forms. They cited the following norms .for writing name
and letters:
4-1/2 years: Prints one or two recognizable letters
5 years: Prints first name
5-1/2 years: Prints first name and first letter of
last name
6 years: Prints first and last names (girls)
6-1/2 years: Prints first and last names (boys)
Before age four, young children try to "write" using
scribbles, particularly circles, as they attempt to show
their intentions through written literacy.
Another revealing investigation about the development
of written literacy in young children was a case study
about a three-year-old preschooler named Anna (Haussler,
25
1985). The researcher followed Anna’s developing ideas
about written literacy through the fellowing stages:
understanding the functions of print, using context in
reading, using print cues, and knowing how to handle
books. The guiding question directing the research was,
"What do three year olds know about written language?" (p.
74).
In stage one, "understanding the function of print,"
Anna demonstrated her knowledge about “the function of
print in her immediate environment in a naturalistic way.
She was able to read the letters TWA (Trans-World
Airlines) wherever they appeared. The three-year-old
subject also demonstrated rudimentary knowledge of
beginning consonants ("graphophonic correspondence for the
initial consonants," p. 75) by reading her parents’ names
whenever she saw them in print.
The second stage, "using context in reading," showed
Anna’s ability to read print that she encountered in her
environment: labels on grocery items, road signs, and
advertisements. When the child saw a particular artifact
associated with something familiar to her, she was able to
"connect" this item to something familiar in her
environment and read it.
In stage three, "using print cues," the author
related how Anna used "a variety of graphic strategies to
construct meaning for the printed signs around her. These
26
strategies included using print to name and using the cues
of configuration and graphophonic correspondence to
respond to text" (p. 77). Items on which Anna used these
strategies were a milk carton, a department store shopping
bag, and a large road sign depicting the letter A.
In the last stage, ”knowing how to handle books,"
Anna exhibited her knowledge about book handling by
differentiating between the front and back of a book and
knowing to read print from left to right and top to
bottom. The researcher, who was also Anna’s mother, used
Clay’s (1973) Sand Test to assess Anna’s knowledge in this
area. As a result of this study, Haussler concluded that
young children are able to react to print at a very young
age when they. are surrounded by a print-saturated
environment.
"Children do not leap from illiteracy to an
understanding that our writing system is alphabetic when
they receive their first phonics lesson," stated Bissex
(1985, p. 101). Having been exposed to a print-saturated
environment long before they begin formal schooling,
children know that print conveys meaning. They have a
developing concept of the functions of the written
language, based on early experimentation with letter
formations, representations, and sounds.
27
According to Ferreiro’s (1982) research, the young
child begins to develop written literacy by using a single
letter or shape to represent an object; The youngster
then proceeds to eennine several shapes to represent
his/her thoughts. Sometime during his/her experimentation
with writing, the child discovers "the correspondence
between writing and speech, first reasoning that letters
represent syllables. and, finally, sounds" and invented
spellings (Bissex, 1985, p. 101). The child’s
explorations result in further discoveries about his/her
language system. The young child conceptualizes this
sizable knowledge of written literacy before entering
school.
Calkins (1986) observed young writers at work as they
engaged in the writing process. She divided the composing
process into four steps: rehearsal, drafting, revision,
and editing. Then she proceeded to discuss each stage in
terms of the youngsters’ grade level. Calkins observed
specific characteristics for each group, but some
necessary overlapping existed because children differ
developmentally.
In the following pages, highlights of Calkins’s
research are presented in outline form.
I.
28
Kindergarten-First Grade (ages 5 and 6)
A.
Rehearsal
l. Rehearses by drawing
2. Basically operates in the present rather
than the future
3. Doesn’t think about topics
4. Most of the child’s meaning is carried by
the picture
5. Drawing may help children with the problem
of topic selection
Drafting
1. Beginning writing with initial consonants
only
2. Using initial and final consonants, with a
sprinkling of other consonants included
3. Using a letter to represent each sound in a
word
4. No spacing between words--not sure where one
word ends and another begins
5. Shows "voice" by darkened letters, oversized
print, or capitals
6. Use of exclamation marks and quotation marks
7. Use of speech during writing provides a
scaffolding within which text can be con-
structed
8. First graders write more than kindergarten-
ers--longer pieces
9. Write attribute books first, then personal
narrative pieces
Revision
1. "Adding on" to their stories
2. Rearranging the pages in their books
D.
29
Editing
1.
2.
Separating words--inserting dashes, dots,
dashes, one word to a line
Concern for spelling rather than for content
II. Second Grade
A.
Rehearsal
1.
2.
Loss of self-confidence: suffer "writer’s
block"
Concern over "the right way" of doing
things--correctness
3. Talking takes the place of drawing--most
children find it easier to embed meaning in
a written text rather than in a drawing/
picture
4. Peer interviews should be encouraged
Drafting
1. Some children write more than in first
grade: some write less
2. Spend more time on margins and headings than
on their stories
3. Finish "writing" quickly
4. Voice is shown through ”and thens" and col-
loquialisms
5. Writes "chain-of-events" stories (bed-to-bed
stories)
6. Writes in patterns
7. Concern about conventions, form, pattern,
and ”real books"
a. Fancy capital letters on the first page
b. Dedications
c. ”About the Author" pages
III.
30
d. Blurbs on the back cover
e. The table of contents
f. Chapters
g. Subheadings
h. Captions underneath pictures
C. Revision
1.
2.
Love "add-on" revisions using scissors,
tape, and arrows
Love revision "activity," but don’t quite
understand the real meaning of revision
D. Editing: Can respond to an editing checklist
devised by the teacher
Third Grade
A. Rehearsal
1.
Overconcern for correctness and convention
Take fewer risks
Reach "the third-grade plateau"
Care very much about their audiences
Tendency to choose "giant topics" and dis-
cuss them with friends
Need help to focus their topic-~usually too
broad
B. Drafting
1.
2.
Topics usually involve incidents from their
lives
Write tightly structured pieces--"chain of
events"
Stories reflect the chronology of life
events rather than their responses to those
events
31
4. Tend to produce one-track, systematic, and
even-paced narratives
5. Tendency to overdo things
6. Transitions, which require distance, con-
trol, and an ability to shift gears, seem
hard for these children
C. Revision
1. Revisions tend to be merely corrections
2. Will experiment with different leads under
teacher’s guidance
3. "Chain of events" narratives
4. Tendency not to think in their heads, but
must write everything down on paper
D. Editing: Same as second grade--can respond to
an editing checklist prepared by the teacher
In an earlier study, Calkins (1983) traced the
writing development of one child, Susie, as she began
writing and gained increased proficiency in written
literacy. At the beginning of the research, eight-year-
old Susie tended to write, edit, revise, and perform other
writing operations in a linear fashion. Later, as her
writing growth continued, she began to view composition as
a series of recursive actions. Her writing development
reflected this new growth.
From this two-year case study, Calkins made
generalizations and applied them to other third- and
fourth-grade writers and their writing development. The
author documented Susie’s writing growth in three areas:
32
development of "an executive function," internalization of
“concrete physical strategies," and development of "a
wider and more flexible field of concerns" (p. 55).
Although there are several accepted versions of the
writing process, for the purpose of this study, the
writing phases or stages were delineated as follows:
1. Prewriting stage: generating ideas and vocabu-
lary, dramatic experiences, and artistic experiences.
2. Drafting stage: actual writing or composing.
3. Sharing stage: sharing piece with peers and/or
teacher.
4. Revising stage: Proofreading, editing, and reor-
ganizing thoughts.
5. Publishing stage: making books and displaying
the writing.
The writing process is not necessarily linear, as it
appears on a list. Writing is a recursive operation.
The literature reviewed in this section revealed that
the young child has the beginnings of literacy when he/she
begins school. Educators can ascertain what young
children already know when they first enter school and
build on that knowledge.
Moffett and Wagner (1983) recommended the following
school activities to build on youngsters’ basic literacy
foundation:
33
l. The opportunity to learn to read and write should
be offered children at every age from three on.
. . . Encouraged, yes; surrounded with literacy
materials and books, occasions to get involved,
people who can help him seize the occasions, yes.
(p. 405)
2. Enrich the environment so that children can be
constantly manipulating interesting objects and
comparing them for their shapes and sounds, among
other features. (p. 406) '
3. Children need to be talked with, read to, and
taken places. They need direct experience with
some of the physical and social things that books
talk about. They need to handle books, turn the
pages, and look at pictures. They need to find
out what writing and reading have to offer--
discover the pleasure and information in books,
become aware of environmental writing such as
signs. (p. 407)
It may be difficult for one teacher to do all of
these activities with a classroom of 30 young children,
and a classroom aide may not be available. However, more
advanced pupils can help the underdeveloped children in
their literacy efforts. Moffett and Wagner referred to
this as "pupil cross-teaching" (p. 407). Such activities
may include reading to the children, conversing (peer
talk) with them, engaging in dramatic play and social
games, helping them with the "letter formation and spatial
orientation in books" (p. 407), and interacting in other
small-group activities.
Moffett and Wagner listed a number of primary
literacy activities” Main activities include the
following:
10.
11.
34
Reading while listening
Dictating while listening
Watching audiovisual presentation
Reading to teacher
Transcribing tape
Punctuating unpunctuated texts
Spelling self-diagnosis
Performing texts
Taking live dictation
Matching letters
Forming letters
The classroom games intended to develop
include:
1.
Card decks
Game boards
Bingo
Dice
Scrabble-type
Letter-moving devices
Stamps and letters
Word cards
Crossword puzzles
Tic-tac-toe
"Tap and Say"
"Word Touring"
Anagrams
literacy skills
35
14. "Get the Point"
15. Spelling games
According to Wagner (1985) , "The teacher needs to
provide an environment rich with resources for making
language connections" (p. 558) . She recommended several
classroom activities for the development of young
children’s emerging literacy. These include:
diaries, learning journals, records of observations,
[writing] true and invented stories, [participating
in] small group tasks, such as generating a list of
questions for research, responding to first drafts of
writing, discussing the meaning of stories or poems,
deciding how to prepare a group report, editing one
another’s work for publication, and planning a
reader’s theatre or other type of rehearsed reading
(p. 558).
Wagner continued:
School environments for integrated learning must be
safe and structured, with ample opportunities for
long periods of reading, writing, and carrying on
task- or topic-oriented conversations in the
classroom. Teachers can serve as models by engaging
in all of these activities with their students. (p.
559)
All of these activities serve to enhance young children’s
language acquisition.
W ' i ' nn - 't c 00
Writing is an important skill for everyone,
particularly minority students. Being a good writer means
that one has acquired the basic ability to communicate
with others. Nonmainstream students are the ones most in
need of the skills required to communicate effectively.
36
They are in the minority and have fewer opportunities than
mainstream children to advance in American society. One
of the main functions of the public school system is to
help children become functional participants of society.
Black parents want their children to have better
opportunities and skills than they had, to succeed
academically, and then to move into the mainstream for
economic reward. Many parents simply lack the time,
knowledge, and skills necessary to help their children
develop written literacy.
Minority students who want to advance socially and
economically, but who lack the basic skills, must have
help to gain the tools needed for access to the economic
reward system, which is controlled by the majority. Such
aid usually comes through the school system. However,
seeking monetary success through better jobs and other
advancements does not mean that nonmainstream students
want to be denuded of the richness of their own culture or
to be divested of the important contribution of 1 their
cultural backgrounds.
All students need time for writing in order to
develop and enhance this essential skill. However,
minority or nonmainstream children are often deprived of
writing time. Well-meaning educators, believing that
these children lack the "basic skills," emphasize drill
37
and fill—in-the-blank. exercises that intensify the
fragmented learning these children receive (Farr &
Daniels, 1986: Moffett, 1983). This procedure is just the
opposite of what they and mainstream pupils need: a
holistic approach to the language arts.
As inner-city children pursue their daily educational
activities, they face many problems stemming from social,
cultural, and environmental factors beyond their control.
These problems include high mobility rates, unstable
family units, and low-paying or nonexistent jobs. Other
negative circumstances include poor health; lack of books,
magazines, paper, and other literacy materials at home;
lack of transportation; and residences in deteriorating
neighborhoods characterized by crowded living conditions
and a high crime rate. Such pervasive problems adversely
affect the child’s adjustment in school, particularly
his/her linguistic and cognitive development.
A major cultural factor operating in the academic
milieu is the requirement, usually unstated, that the
minority child adjust to the middle-class value system of
the school. In many instances, the value system the
children bring with them to school and return to after
dismissal is in direct conflict with the values and
beliefs educators are projecting as they strive to prepare
these children for their roles in the larger society.
38
Morine and Marine (1970) addressed this problémyh%\
which has implications for administrative personnel as
well as for teachers:
The particular difficulty with educating inner-city
children as opposed to middle-class children is that
the middle-class child comes to school having been
told a great deal about his role in school. The
inner-city child, on the other hand, has to learn his
role upon arrival in school. He needs to try out a
variety of behaviors to find out which one is the one
that gets him attention. We [educators] need to set
up and define roles that will enable the child to
attain the ends we have set up for him. We need,
then, to support him with attention at any time he is
playing the desired role. (p. 13)
Another factor adversely affecting minority children
is the lack of parental role models in the area of
writing. Children need to see the significant adults in
their lives engaged in the task of writing or composing.
Many researchers have spoken of the importance of modeling
in the writing development of young children (Ascher,
1982: Burrows & Lundsteen, 1976; Graves, 1983). If the
modeling aspect of writing is so important for students of
the dominant culture, one can only conclude that inner-
city students, who are experiencing so many negative
conditions beyond their control, need even more of this
type of positive adult influence.
Inner-city children’s writing and other academic
difficulties are exacerbated by mainstream resistance to
the validity of their dialect. The use of a dialect can
affect how quickly a child acquires written literacy. Yet
it
hit
se
p0
la
th
Ed
19
de
a:
Er
WE
la
39
it is the teacher’s attitude toward the language of the
bidialectical student, rather than use of a dialect per
se, that is important. The teacher must be warm,
positive, and appreciative of the rich diversity of
language backgrounds nonmainstream students bring with
them into the classroom environment (Alexander, 1985;
Edwards, 1985; Johnson, 1985; King & Karlson, 1982: Scott,
1985: Smitherman, 1975, 1981, 1985: Turner, 1985).
Everyone speaks a dialect, although some people may
deny this fact. Shuy (1967) wrote that "many Americans
are unaware that they and their friends speak a variety of
English which can be called a dialect. Many even deny it"
(p. l). Perrin (1972) noted, "All of us speak a dialect
(or several dialects), though we may not realize that we
do, since our neighbors for miles around speak the same
way we do" (p. 90). Barnitz (1980) defined dialect as "a
language system identifiable to a particular geographic
area (regional dialect) and social class (social dialect)"
(p. 780).
According to Perrin (1972), a dialect is a language
system that has distinct characteristics differentiating
it from the language spoken by people in different regions
of the same country. Linguists agree that the United
States has three major dialects: Northern, Midland, and
Southern (Perrin, 1972: Shuy, 1967). These dialects
differ from region to region in three major ways:
voc
dia
by '
of
con
is
inc
The
sys
thi
who
Soc
tha
inf
sta
COg
Spe
emr
not
tic
Ver
V35
4O
vocabulary, usage, and pronunciation. The particular
dialect addressed in this literature review is that spoken
by basically low-income black children in inner-city areas
of most major cities in the United States.
For the past 15 years, there has been an ongoing
controversy about whether Vernacular Black English (VBE)
is a legitimate language and whether its users are
incompetent linguistically, verbally, and intellectually.
The position taken in this study is that the language
system or dialect is legitimate and that people who speak
this dialect are not intellectually inferior to those
who speak Standard English or other dialects.
Research findings have supported this position.
Sociolinguistic. researchers have proven systematically
that it is erroneous to regard children who use VBE as
inferior. Bereiter and Englemann (1966) disagreed,
stating that users of VBE are deficient linguistically and
cognitively. In fact, VBE is a language system that has
specific phonetic and syntactic rules, which its users
employ. This rule-governed system is merely different,
not deficient (Labov, 1972b: Steffenson, 1978). VBE is
rich in content and style, and children who use it are
very verbal, usually outside of the classroom.
It is in the classroom that minority children who use
VBE face their greatest problem: Their language is
di
cl
by
ch
re
in
pr
in
th
an
in
an
fe
ch
he
ma
1a
Sit
Cor
41
different from the Standard English spoken in the
classroom. In most cases, their dialect is not accepted
by the teacher, who is a significant other in all
children’s lives. Educators are charged with the
responsibility of educating the society’s children and
inculcating the values that society deems necessary for
productive citizenship. When a teacher detects an "error"
in a child’s speech pattern or in his/her written work,
the automatic response is to "correct" the child. Farr
and Daniels (1986) stated that:
American school teachers also have a strong
professional tradition as guardians of the genteel
culture, especially as it is reflected in polite,
standard language. Every school teacher--not just
those specifically assigned to teach English and
language arts--feels some sense of duty to uphold
correctness in speech and writing. (p. 49)
Racial issues have proven to be factors in the
interrelationships between linguistically diverse pupils
and their teachers. On the other hand, black teachers may
feel an additional responsibility to "correct" black
children’s dialectical speech patterns in an effort to
help their identity group achieve success in the
mainstream culture.
Many sociolinguists believe that to reject a person’s
language is to reject the person him/ herself. Steffenson
(1978) contended that the teacher’s race may be a
significant factor in considering dialect within the
context of the classroom. In fact, teachers’ attitudes
42
and expectations have been found to be major factors
affecting student achievement. Researchers who have done
extensive research on effective schools have documented
this finding (Brookover et al., 1982: Edmonds, 1979:
Lezotte, 1979).
A landmark case pertaining to teachers’ attitudes
toward and acceptance of minority children who use
nonstandard English was Martin L. King School Children v.
the Ann Arbor School Board. The case concerned 15 (later
11) low-income black school children from the Green Road
housing project, located in the upper-middle-class
community of Ann Arbor, Michigan. The lawsuit centered on
two major issues: (a) the children were not being taught
to read, and (b) they were being subjected to
psychological damage by nonaccepting teachers. At the
time of the lawsuit, there was one black teacher on the
faculty. The remainder of the teaching staff was white.
These low-income pupils were also being placed in special
classes and given such labels as emotionally impaired,
learning disabled, mentally deficient, and so on. Geneva
Smitherman, a speech professor at Wayne State university
and an expert on linguistics, was the chief witness for
the children. She successfully established the case for
accepting black dialect as a legitimate language system.
Equally important, she addressed the issue of better
43
teacher preparation in understanding and accepting the
children’s speech.
Not every black person uses VBE, although 80% to 90%
of the blacks in America today speak Black English
(Dillard, 1972). However, most 'blacks who do use
nonstandard English can also use Standard English when the
occasion calls for it. Therefore, children must be taught
to "code-switch" (Smitherman, 1977). Middle-class black
children receive such instruction at home; low-income
children do not. Many of their parents are poorly
educated and do not speak Standard English themselves.
Consequently, educators :must fill this void. and teach
these children when to use each type of English.
Moffett and Wagner (1983) recommended the following
tactics to increase the oral and written literacy of
pupils who use nonstandard English. Teachers should have
children:
1. Converse constantly with Standard English speak-
ers.
2. Listen to tape-recordings of Standard English as
they follow the text with their eyes.
3. Role-play speakers of the major dialect. This
gives them a chance to experience another dialect
community without rejecting their own.
4. Participate in small peer groups.
44
5. Serve as an audience for performances by others
using the standard dialect.
6. Write small skits and participate in them.
In W (Brooks, 1985), teachers can
find other suggestions for helping dialectically different
youngsters. Some of those ideas are:
1. Having children listen to the teacher read aloud
in the standard dialect.
2. Having pupils listen to and view films, slides,
and film strips.
3. Showing children movies of famous Black Ameri-
cans, such as Dr. Martin L. King, Jr.--especially his
speeches.
4. Providing lots of good literature.
5. Providing numerous opportunities for reading and
writing.
6. Having pupils participate in small discussion
groups.
As stated. before, ‘the importance of listening to
recorded Standard English texts has been strongly
recommended (Brooks et al., 1985: Moffett & Wagner, 1983:
Smitherman, 1977). NOnmainstream children who speak VBE
as labeled by Labov (1972) can best be helped to learn the
standard dialect by exposing them to speakers of Standard
English, whether in person or through recordings. Moffett
and Wagner particularly advocated that linguistically
45
diverse children listen to tape recordings of Standard
English as they follow the text with their eyes. This is
an effective, nonthreatening way to increase the oral and
written literacy of minority children.
America’s children--black, white, brown, yellow, and
red--are her greatest resource. Every opportunity must be
taken to help them grow up to be active, well-educated,
and productive members of society. Minorities,
especially' low-income: ones, need. the school’s aid and
acceptance. To paraphrase author James Baldwin, one
cannot expect a child to learn when his whole being,
through his language, has been rejected..
Educators are charged with the responsibility of
teaching composition skills, not just to mainstream pupils
but also to. those students who are socially,
linguistically, and culturally different. Darnell (1974)
noted three ways teachers can help nonmainstream students
develop literacy: (a) adopt a warm, positive attitude
toward the students’ unique cultural differences: (b) use
the children’s rich cultural experiences as a base on
which to develop literacy; and (c) select curriculum
materials with which the pupils can identify.
Later researchers have built on these general
suggestions. Most recently, Farr and Daniels (1986)
isolated 15 key factors associated with effective writing
46
instruction for linguistically different children. A
brief description of each factor is presented in the
following pages.
1. "Teachers who understand and appreciate the basic
linguistic competence that students bring with
them to school, and who therefore have positive
expectations for students’ achievements in
writing." (p. 45)
Educators, especially teachers who work so intimately
with children, must become aware of the dissemination of
the linguistic research relating to nonstandard dialects.
The data have proved the importance of teacher attitude in
teaching writing to speakers of nonstandard English (Perl
& Wilson, 1986). Students need to feel that they are
acceptable in their teachers’ eyes. To reject a child’s
language is to reject the child him/herself.
2. "Regular and substantial practice in writing,
aimed at developing fluency." (p. 45)
Children need to write approximately 50 to 60 minutes
every day (Graves, 1983) . The more the children write,
the greater their rate of fluency. Minority students
often lack opportunities to write outside of school.
Therefore, it is imperative that teachers provide regular
class periods for composition.
3. "The opportunity to write for real, personally
significant purposes.” (p. 45)
For writing to become the deep learning experience it
should be, children should be allowed to choose their own
topics. When they are given this personal choice, they
47
tend to write more than if they were given a list of
topics and told to choose one and write about it (Graves,
1974). Also, as Graves noted, "Children who are fed
topics, story starters, lead sentences, even opening
paragraphs as a steady diet for three or four years
rightfully panic when topics have to come from them" (p.
22). Young children, both mainstream and linguistically
different ones, tend to choose topics about which they
have some knowledge for their written compositions. They
take particular pride in sharing this knowledge with
others.
Another factor to consider when youngsters choose
their own topics is that some children may choose a
subject they do not know much about, but are interested
enough in the subject to want to learn more about it.
This enthusiasm is vital because the young writer can
research his/her topic, thus increasing the child’s store
of knowledge.
The use of textbook "leads" and duplicating masters
limits a child’s writing. The youngster simply may not be
interested in the current topic selected as a writing
subject.
4. "Experience in writing for a wide range of audi-
ences, both inside and outside. of school." (p.
45)
When one is writing to a specific audience, one
usually has a specific intention or purpose in mind. The
48
content of the composition varies according to the
audience to whom the writing is directed.
Children should have an opportunity to write to many
audiences or different types of readers (Calkins, 1983:
Farr & Daniels, 1986; Moffett, 1983: NCTE, 1969). The
teacher is usually the one and only audience or receiver
of most young children’s writing. This situation needs to
change because young authors, mainstream as well as
nonmainstream, need the experience of writing for peers,
parents, community leaders, and others. Composing for
various audiences fosters growth in writing.
5. "Rich and continuous reading experience, includ-
ing both published literature of acknowledged
mgrit and the work of peers and instructors." (p.
Much has been written about the importance of
surrounding children with a rich print environment to
provide them with resources and experiences to draw upon
when they begin to write (Graves, 1983: Moffett & Wagner,
1983). Youngsters from homes in which written literacy is
not emphasized especially need to have these experiences
provided by the school.
6. "Exposure to models of writing in process and
writers at work, including both teachers and
classmates." (p. 45)
Young writers need to see how the writing process
"flows" from beginning to end. Then they will become
aware that the act of composing is not necessarily a
49
smooth process leading to a direct end. The writer may
make many different copies before displaying the finished
product or presenting it to an audience. Inner-city
pupils, who may be experiencing writing problems relating
to their dialect, should see pieces of writing with cross-
outs, arrows, corrections, and other editing marks. This
is essential because they are not only learning how to put
their ideas down on paper, but they are also learning to
do so in a dialect different from their own. The task is
much more difficult for such children and for their
teacher, but it is not insurmountable (Markham, 1984).
Children tend to see adults as omnipotent--powerful
in all respects. In the area of writing, they rarely see
works in progress. They see the finished product and have
no idea of the doodling, false starts, crumpled pages, and
so on, that actually accompany the art of writing. To a
child, a piece of writing was instantly created by a
powerful adult. Graves (1983) wrote:
Think of children: they have seen even fewer writers
compose. Ask children how adults write. Their
replies blend concepts of witchcraft and alchemy.
Children suggest that when adults write, the words
flow, arrive "Shazam!" on the page. Like the
Tablets, words are dictated to us from on high; we
only hold the pen and a mysterious force dictates
stories, poems, and letters. The better the writer,
the less the struggle. (p. 43)
Nonmainstream children have even fewer opportunities
to see writing-in-progress. Therefore, like majority
50
children, they are unaware of the trials of the writing
craft. The young black dialect writer may make systematic
errors in his/her writing, and if the teacher is not
acquainted with the latest research in writing and covers
the child’s paper with red marks and negative comments,
the youngster’s self-esteem suffers. Being of the
minority in America, the child may already have problems
with acceptance in school and in the larger society. A
negatively received piece of writing only exacerbates the
child’s adjustment in school and attitude toward writing.
7. "Instruction in the processes ,of writing; that
is, learning to work at a given writing task in
appropriate phases, including prewriting,
drafting, and revising." (p. 45)
Teachers can organize a writing workshop or studio
(Graves, 1983) in their classrooms to teach the five
stages in the writing process: prewriting, drafting,
sharing, revising, and publishing. Then, by modeling the
process him/herself, the instructor can instruct the
children in how to work in each different phase.
8. "Collaborative activities for students that pro-
vide ideas for writing and guidance for revising
works in progress." (p. 45)
Graves’ s (1983) writing workshop method, with its
emphasis on sharing, peer editing, and small group work,
can be used effectively in collaborative activities. The
studio approach allows children to work creatively
51
together, sharing' ideas, editing' each. other’s ‘writing,
and, in general, learning from each other.
9. "One-to-one writing conferences with the
teacher." (p. 45)
The writing conference (good for all students) can
help inner-city students, who may feel alienated in the
middle-class school structure, become more comfortable
with their classroom teacher. As they begin to feel
comfortable and more self-confident about having their
writing, language, and thus, essentially, themselves
accepted, their attitudes toward writing and other aspects
of the school curriculum will become more positive.
10. "Direct instruction in specific strategies and
techniques for writing." (p. 46)
Besides being presented with adult models and viewing
pieces of writing in various stages of completion,
children need to be taught specific tips that writers use
when composing. For example, minority students should be
given the necessary help in translating dialectic idioms
or differences in verb tenses into Standard English. The
teacher must be careful in providing such help so as not
to make the writer feel rejected.
11. "Reduced instruction in grammatical terminology
and related drills, with increased use of
sentence combining activities." (p. 46)
Researchers such as Hillocks (1986) have shown that
endless drilling in learning the parts of speech and
countless hours of diagramming sentences have not produced
52
better writers. Sentence combining, on the other hand,
has been proven successful as an alternate approach to
learning grammar. The method involves letting children
combine short "kernel" sentences into progressively longer
and more complex ones.
12. "Teaching of writing mechanics and grammar in
the context of students’ actual compositions,
rather than in separate drills or exercises."
(P- 45)
The best text to use in teaching writing is the
child’s writing itself because the youngster has chosen an
interesting topic and transcribed on paper his/her own
ideas and feelings about this subject. The result is an
intensely personal piece of writing in which the child has
a keen interest. In wishing to share this work with
others, the child will want to present it at its best.
Consequently, he/she will voluntarily correct errors,
maintaining a high level of interest while doing so.
In the first grade, it is common to teach young
children manuscript writing or printing and to allocate
instructional time for this purpose. Cursive writing is
traditionally introduced in grade three, and children are
taught correct letter formation. Schools traditionally
assign time to practice handwriting skills, although time
for composition may not be specified.
Composition, however, is not handwriting practice.
Children need time to develop proficiency in both of these
53
essential subjects. In fact, when children are allowed to
write for actual audiences and for real purposes, they
become excited about and interested in what they are
composing. The message becomes important. They then want
to share their writing with others. When it is pointed
out to them that the message must be clear to their
audience, they will voluntarily assume the responsibility
to form their letters correctly, correct errors, and make
their work neat and legible. Concern with mastering the
formal conventions of writing and using excessive school
time for their purpose can be categorized under "writing
to master the conventions of writing" (Farr & Daniels,
1986, p. 53). The four remaining major purposes of
writing, as stated by Farr and Daniels, are "writing to
learn, writing to communicate, writing to express the
self, and writing to create" (p. 53).
13. "Moderate marking of surface structure errors,
focusing on sets or patterns of related errors."
(Po 45)
When pupils receive a composition that the instructor
has corrected extensively in red, they tend to feel embar-
rassed and doubtful about their writing ability. (”Some
minority___pupils may interpret extensive“corrections—"as a
Hue--1—____ _ __., .-._.._-
fl _
further rejection of themselves in an already threatening,
/o
\l
cold emotional environment that may exist in their school./
Moderate correction of errors, sensitively offered, can
54
allow the student to retain some feeling of self-worth in
relation to his/her writing. Also, analyzing patterns of
errors and allowing the child to work at-eliminating them
one group at a time can make the task of revision seem
less insurmountable.
14. "Flexible and cumulative evaluation of student
writing that stresses revision and is sensitive
to variations in subject, audience, and pur-
pose." (p. 46)
Premature evaluation of children’s writing may lead
them to think that once a piece of writing has been
graded, it is finished, never to be returned to again. A
writing folder with pieces of work completed and in
progress can be compiled and used in teaching children how
to revise their work. Students should also engage in
various types of writing for many different audiences.
The purposes of this writing should vary, also.
15. "Practicing and using writing as a tool of
learning in all subjects in the curriculum, not
just in English." (p. 46)
Writing-across-the-curriculum (Britton et al., 1975)
entails using writing as a teaching-learning tool in all
subject areas. In the elementary school, this means that
children daily use writing skills in some way in their
lessons from the other disciplines. Integrating
composition with the other subjects is easier for the
elementary teacher, who usually teaches in a self-
contained classroom, than it is for the secondary teacher.
55
The elementary teacher has the same group of students in
the classroom all day and teaches them all subjects. This
facilitates the correlation of writing with other
curriculum activities and allows for more flexibility in
scheduling the time needed for integrating writing.
As stated previously, integrating writing with other
subject areas can be accomplished fairly easily in a self-
contained classroom because the teacher has the same
students all day and instructs them in all subjects.
Scheduling the large blocks of time needed for writing is
also simplified. Writing is an excellent tool for
learning content in subjects such as science and social
studies (Sanders, 1985; Tchudi & Tchudi, 1983; Thaiss,
1986).
According to Farr and Daniels (1986), proper use of
these key principles should enable teachers of minority
children, as well as other youngsters, to enhance their
pupils’ progress in composition literacy. Finally,
Holbrook (1984) summarized the research done by Goldberg
(1984), Graves (1978), and Howard (1984) to illustrate,
also, some classroom characteristics for an effective
writing program. The characteristics are as follows:
(1) opportunity for students to write frequently,
even in the primary grades, with delayed or "as
needed" instruction in grammar; (2) teachers writing
with students; (3) students learning to write for
many audiences and in many modes, including those
56
required in content area classrooms: and (4)
nonthreatening evaluation of student writing with
emphasis on revision rather than correction. (p. 21)
Summary
The review of literature was presented in two
sections. Section one discussed the writing development
of young children in general. Young children possess more
linguistic knowledge than is generally realized when they
enter the formal school environment. It is the teacher’s
challenge to discover and build on that knowledge.
Section two explored the literature about the young
black dialect writer. Studies have shown that the dialect
spoken by linguistically diverse children is not an
inferior form of language. It is just different from that
spoken by the majority culture. Vernacular Black English
(VBE) has its own system of rules, and it should not be a
deterrent to the black child’s learning ability unless the
educational system makes it so.
CHAPTER III
DESIGN AND METHODOLOGY
0 uc
The design of the study is explained in this chapter.
A descriptive-analysis approach was used because it
allowed the researcher to fulfill the purpose of the
study: to observe and describe the primary-grade
composition curriculum of an inner-city school and to
delineate the problems and supports that the teachers and
pupils might encounter in the daily performance of their
writing program.
Definiriens e: n Deeeriptive Stngy
Isaac and ZMichael (1981) said. the purpose of
descriptive research is "to describe systematically the
facts and characteristics of a given population or area of
interest, factually and accurately" (p. 46). They went on
to state that
descriptive research is used in the literal sense of
describing situations or events. It is the
accumulation of a data base that is solely
descriptive--it does not necessarily seek or explain
relationships, test hypotheses, make predictions, or
get at meanings and implications. (p. 46)
57
58
Van Dalen (1979) made the following statements about
descriptive studies:
1.
Descriptive data are usually collected by
administering' questionnaires, interviewing
subjects, observing events, or analyzing
documentary sources. Descriptive studies range
from simple surveys that do little more than ask
questions and report answers about the status quo
to studies that present explicit statements about
the relationships between variables which
approach the level of the explanatory hypotheses
one finds in experimental research. In status
desc i t've s rve s, investigators do not try to
relate one variable to another. They merely
search for accurate information about the
characteristics of particular subjects (Ss),
groups, institutions, or situations or about the
frequency with which something occurs. (p. 285)
When trying to solve problems, researchers in
educational, governmental, industrial, and
political organizations often conduct surveys.
They collect detailed descriptions of existing
phenomena with the intent of employing the data
to justify current conditions and practices or to
make more intelligent plans for improving them.
Their objective may be not only to ascertain
status but also to determine the adequacy of
status by comparing it with selected or
established standards. (p. 286)
Since cultures, communities, students, and
schools differ from one another and no culture is
absolutely uniform in nature, descriptive data
can mirror only particular aspects of specific
events or conditions in a given setting. (p. 347)
"Research involving the collection of data for the
purpose of describing conditions as they exist is called
descriptive or etatus researen" (Sax, 1968, p. 288). Sax
further stated that "in descriptive research an account of
the current status of some person or problem is obtained
59
without the investigator’s influencing or controlling his
subjects, events, stimuli, or materials” (p. 324).
Finally, in the Dictionary of Edncetion, Good (1973)
defined the descriptive method in research as
the general procedures employed in studies that have
for their chief purpose the description of phenomena,
in contrast to ascertaining what caused them or what
their value and significance are (according to some,
the term should be restricted to status studies,
including simple surveys; according to others, the
term is extended to include descriptions of change,
such as historical studies or growth studies). (p.
174)
Demographic gnaracteristics of
rhe Study Senting
The researcher chose an inner-city elementary school
in a medium-sized industrial city in Michigan as the study
site. She conducted an in-depth study of that school’s
writing program for grades kindergarten through three (the
primary grades).
The city, with a population of approximately 80,000
residents, is surrounded by several more affluent suburban
conclaves. The 1980 Census Report gave the population
figure as 77,508 people. The breakdown, according to
racial origin, is as follows:
White 44,468
Black 27,555
American Indian, Eskimo, and Aleut 399
Asian and Pacific Islander 185
Other 4,901
This medium-sized city has experienced a decrease in
population commensurate with the typical ”white-flight"
6O
syndrome of the late 1960s and the 19708. Many white
families left the city to live in the surrounding suburbs
and exurbs, leaving most of the minorities to reside in
the inner city and its immediate environs. The 1970
Census Report showed a population of 91,847 compared to
77,508 in 1980. This represents a decrease of 14,339
people.
The majority of the labor force comprised private
wage and salary workers, 19,537. Government workers
ranked second with 4,035 persons, and self-employed
workers comprised the third highest number, 779. The data
given are estimates based on a sample.
The mean income for city residents of this population
sample was $16,914, whereas it was $24,131 in the
surrounding suburbs and rural areas. Three income types
were categorized in the Census Report. For the 19,193
households with earnings, the mean income was $18,929.
Social Security was the major source of income for 7,826
households: the mean Social Security income was $4,158.
The 5,639 families on public assistance had a mean income
of $3,413 per household. These data were reported for
1979 (1980 Census Report).
e ct' o e A nd ce e te
The local school district selected for the study is
known throughout Michigan and nationally for its many
61
progressive and innovative educational programs and
services. Some of these programs and services include:
1.
10.
11.
12.
The Successful Schools Project (S3 P)
The Academic Achievement Program (A2 P)
The Assertive Discipline Program
The Program for the Creative and Academically
Talented--elementary students
The Center for the Arts and Sciences--secondary
students
Early Childhood Education Department
The Lifelong Learning Center--adult and
continuing education
Instructional Theory Into Practice (ITIP)--
teacher training program
Clinical Supervision--teacher-evaluation program
The Learning Center--handicapped
students
The Education Center--handicapped
students
The Career Opportunities Center--
vocational education
Other activities offered by this district for pupils are:
1.
Reading Is Fundamental (RIF)
Battle of the Books Competition
Young Writers’ Conference
City-wide Spelling Bee
Science and Engineering Fair
The Math Olympics
62
7. The Math Pentathlon
8. The Mid-Michigan Minority Engineering Program
In addition, one elementary school in the district
was recognized by the 0.8. Department of Education in 1986
as one of the 210 outstanding public. schools in the
nation. Three other elementary schools have been named
by the Michigan Department of Education as among the most
improved in the nation.
The district has 24 elementary schools, 5 junior high
or intermediate schools, and 2 large, comprehensive high
schools serving approximately 17,000 students. Six other
buildings or centers offer additional services and
learning experiences to students from the district, as
well as those from outlying districts. Administration of
the attendance. centers is divided into 48 separate
departments within the central office complex: each is
supervised by a department head reporting to the
appropriate superintendent.
Before initiating the research project, the
researcher had to obtain approval to conduct the study
from Michigan State University. This was accomplished
through the University Committee on Research Involving
Human Subjects (UCRIHS), which reviewed the research
proposal. This intensive review and subsequent approval
were necessary before initiating any research involving
the use of human or animal subjects or hazardous
63
materials. The researcher received written approval from
UCRIHS on May 7, 1987. (See Appendix A: Correspondence.)
The researcher, a black teacher at another school in
the district, began the search for a research site during
the 1986-87 school year. She contacted the principals of
three elementary schools and described the proposed study
to them. This initial contact yielded two possible
research sites. The researcher chose one of these schools
and began to communicate with the principal through
telephone calls and written requests through inter-office
mail. After having chosen a study site, the researcher
wrote to the Assistant Superintendent of Administration
and Personnel, asking permission to conduct the study.
Such permission was granted.
Originally, the investigator had planned to conduct
the classroom observations, distribute the questionnaires,
and conduct the interview sessions during the month of
May. However, because of the spring testing schedule,
central office administrators thought May would not be a
good time to gather the data. They suggested that the
research be conducted during the summer or the early fall.
Collecting data during the summer was not feasible because
the purpose of the investigation was to study the primary-
grade writing program of .an elementary school in
operation. Observing students and the writing instruction
in a summer school setting would not have yielded
64
appropriate data for the study. Thus, the researcher
decided to begin data gathering in the early fall. The
month of September was eliminated as a possible time to
begin classroom research because the teachers and students
needed time to adjust to a new school year, solidify
schedules, and otherwise settle into the regular classroom
routine. Permission was granted to enter the classrooms
in October.
Qescrintion of the Scnooi Setting
The elementary school selected for the study
is located on a relatively quiet street. Railroad tracks
lie on the western boundary, past an expressway
interchange. The expressway system is also visible on the
northern edge of the site.
Three hundred one students, grades kindergarten
through six, were enrolled in the school at the time of
the research. These students were supervised and taught
by a male principal and ten regular classroom teachers.
Three resource teachers were on the staff to serve those
students who needed extra instruction in reading and
mathematics. One special education teacher was based at
the school. Other supportive personnel included the
school secretary, the lunch hostess, two lunch aides, one
general aide, and two custodians. Although she was not
listed on the school roster, a library aide worked at the
65
school during the time of the study. These personnel data
were derived from the 1986-87 Staff Directory of the
participating school district.
The school plant is a large (33,796 square feet),
two-story red brick building that was built in 1936. It
is surrounded by a 2.5-acre grassy area. Adjacent to the
school property is a city-owned park that bears the same
name as the school. This park, being so close to the
school campus, seems to extend the school lawns, giving
the site a verdant, parklike appearance. The researcher
visited the research site several times. on week-ends to
note the location of the playground equipment and to make
diagrams and sketches of the setting.
Seleetion er tne Partieinnnts
The study required the cooperation of five teachers
and the students in their classrooms. One kindergarten,
one first grade, one second grade, one third grade, and
one third/fourth-grade combination classroom were included
in the study (see Table l).
The researcher began the teacher-selection process by
arranging a visit with the building principal on August
27, 1987, during the preservice teacher-preparation week.
She explained the purpose of the study and the methodology
to be used. The principal suggested that the researcher
come to the school building and explain the study to the
66
primary-grade teachers. The researcher complied with this
request at a faculty meeting on September 8, 1987. The
teachers agreed to participate in the study by signing
their names on the briefing outline and indicating the
time of day they taught writing--whether during the
morning or afternoon session.
Table l.--Number of students per classroom.
Teacher Grade(s) Pupil
Participant Taught Enrollment
A Kindergarten 27/23
B First 21
C Second 26
D Third 25
E Third/fourth 23
During the remainder of September, the writer visited
the research site and obtained class lists and schedules.
On October 1, 1987 , she distributed file boxes to each
classroom: these contained a writing folder for each
child. On the same day, she distributed the teacher-
volunteer participant letters, the parental consent
letters, and the informed consent forms. (See Appendix B.)
Because the purpose of the study was to investigate
the conditions affecting the teaching of composition in
the primary grades, the group of participating teachers
included only the five primary teachers in this school and
67
the children under their immediate supervision. Ten
children were selected at random for surveying and
interviewing, one boy and one girl from each of the
participating classrooms. In addition, the researcher
collected all of the field-writing samples of these ten
children. To ensure their anonymity, the five boys were
assigned odd numbers for identification purposes: the
girls were designated by even numbers.
The privacy of the five participating teachers was
protected by assigning each one a letter, according to
their grade level, as follows: kindergarten--A, first--B,
second--C, third--D, and third/fourth combination--E.
The five classroom instructors distributed the
parental consent letters and informed consent forms to all
the pupils in their classrooms. The researcher returned
to the school several times to collect signed forms and to
bring additional letters and forms to replace those that
had been lost.
e s c st ents
The Qnesrionneires
The three administrator questionnaires (Assistant
Superintendent for Elementary Education, Language Arts
Coordinator, Principal) were designed to obtain an
overview of the primary-grade composition program, a
specialized view of writing and its place in the K-3
68
curriculum, and a perspective of the writing program in
operation, respectively. The administrators were asked
the same six questions, although the items were worded
somewhat differently to reflect each individual’s position
in the school district.
The teacher questionnaire was divided into two parts.
Part one was designed to obtain information about the
teacher’s professional background and training in
composition. Part two asked for a description of the
teacher’s current writing program and the curriculum
materials employed in that program.
The student questionnaire also had two parts. Part
one contained eight questions concerning the children’s
writing habits and attitudes toward writing. Part two
included four questions about the children’s reading
habits and attitudes.
nte 'ews
Interviews were conducted with the three
administrators during the second and third weeks of the
observation period. The purpose of the interview was to
amplify their answers to questionnaire items and to
ascertain their knowledge about current research and
practices concerning writing. Part one of the interview
contained two introductory questions designed to expand on
questionnaire answers and elicit additional information
69
concerning composition. Questions concerning awareness of
the latest research in writing comprised part two. The
questions were derived from the book Lnngnage Diversity
eng Writing Insrrncrion (Farr & Daniels, 1986). In this
book, the authors listed 15 key factors associated with
effective writing instruction that apply to both
nonmainstream and mainstream children. The researcher
analyzed the 15 factors and devised five general questions
geared to the district and the building levels.
The teacher interview was also in two sections. In
addition to the two introductory questions asked of the
administrators, teachers were asked two further questions.
The first question, "How did you learn to write?" explored
the teacher’ 5 personal experiences with writing. The
second item, "Describe how you would teach a class of
children to write if you didn’t have any restraints--an
ideal situation," sought to obtain information about the
teacher’s philosophy of writing and ideas about the
writing curriculum. All of Farr and Daniels’s (1986) 15
factors were addressed in the teacher interviews because
those factors are particularly meaningful for instruction.
Questions on these key factors constituted section two.
The questions for the student questionnaire and
interview were the same and were discussed earlier in this
section. This portion of the data collection was
7O
initiated and completed during the second and third weeks
of October. Samples of all the research instruments are
included in Appendix B.
e ods o a a
Documents
State decumenrs. The researcher wrote many letters
requesting various state documents. She made numerous
telephone calls to personnel in various offices in the
Michigan State Department of Education in Lansing.
Examples of correspondence dates and the documents
requested are given below:
November 30, 1986 Available writing materials
December 20, 1986 Final copy of the Revised
Writing Objectives (K-12)
March 11, 1987 Michigan Essential Goals and
Objectives for Writing
April 4, 1987 State Teacher Certification
Requirements
October 14, 1987 The Writing Education Inter-
pretive Report
October 26, 1987 The Michigan Educational Assess-
ment Program Writing Test Items
November 11, 1987 1982-83 Michigan Educational
Assessment Program Writing Edu-
cation Interpretive Report
November 11, 1987 Writing Assessment Manual and
Student Booklets
November 11, 1987 "Using the Primary Trait System
for Evaluating Writing" by Ina
Mullis, NAEP, 1980
71
January 12, 1988 NCTE: Guidelines for the Prep-
aration of Teachers of English
Language Arts
These and other documents were examined to glean
information about state and district guidelines and
expectations, as well as teachers’ choices regarding the
primary-grade writing program.
Lgeai schgoi gistrict geennenre. The researcher
checked. files, ‘wrote: letters and reminder’ notes, made
numerous telephone calls, and visited several key
personnel to obtain the school documents reviewed for this
study. The documents obtained include the school
district’s language arts philosophy, a draft of
the language arts goal statements, partial contents from
the Kindergarten Curriculum Guide, partial contents from
the Handbook of Language Arts Objectives (grades one
through six), three documents relating to the local school
district’s philosophy regarding effective schools, and
three pages about the Academic Achievement Program (A2 P).
(See Appendix D: Local School District Documents.) Also,
the researcher obtained three elevations, or diagrams, of
the school plant.
c ts . The researcher
collected teacher materials primarily during October 1987.
She made additional visits to the research site to collect
documents in November and December 1987 and January 1988.
Most of the data collected were in the original form.
72
However, in some cases, the researcher had to make
sketches and diagrams of the artifacts. Xerox copies were
made of some material. These materials include copies of
pupils’ textbooks and teachers’ manuals, samples of the
duplicating masters used in instruction, Workshop Way
folders, a "Busy Book," and a template of the cursive
alphabet ranging from Aa to 22.
Personnel
Questionnaires. After gathering documents, preparing
the research instruments, and making several visits to the
attendance center, the researcher formally entered the
research setting. During the preservice teacher-
preparation week, the research instruments were printed
and prepared for distribution to the study participants.
On October 1, 1987, the researcher distributed the file
boxes, writing folders, parental consent letters, informed
consent forms, and teacher volunteer-participant letters
to the teachers. Collection of the completed forms began
on October 2 and continued through the following week.
The researcher delivered the questionnaire to the
principal at the research site. She called the other two
administrators, the Assistant Superintendent for Elemen-
tary Education and the Language Arts Coordinator, to
explain the purpose of the study and the questionnaire,
and to request their cooperation and set a time for a
73
follow-up: interview. The: district -administrators’
questionnaires were distributed during the first week of
October. The researcher sent the questionnaires for the
Assistant Superintendent for Elementary Education and the
Language Arts Coordinator via inter-office mail. The
principal’s questionnaire was placed in a large envelope
and given to him during a visit to the research site. The
principal’s questionnaire was returned on October 12. The
researcher collected the other two administrators’
questionnaires on October 21, before their respective
interviews.
After allowing the five teachers time to collect the
parental consent forms, the researcher gave them the
teacher questionnaires on October 9. They were explained
to each instructor. Originally, the completed
questionnaires were to have been returned to the
researcher at her school base through inter-office mail.
However, because she was on-site, she was able to collect
the questionnaires from the four teachers who completed
all aspects of the study as they had agreed to do. The
dates on which the teacher questionnaires were returned ’
were as follows:
74
Teacher A--kindergarten October 13, 1987
*Teacher B--first grade October 19, 1987
Teacher C--second grade October 15, 1987
Teacher D--third grade October 23, 1987
Teacher E--third/fourth grade October 16, 1987
The older primary-age children involved in this study
could already read and write, so they completed their
questionnaires independently. These were two second
graders and four third graders--two from the third-grade
room and two children from the third/fourth-grade
combination classroom. Thus, six pupils completed the
questionnaires by themselves.
The researcher helped the kindergarteners and the
first graders complete their questionnaires. She read
them the questions on both the writing and the reading
questionnaires and recorded their answers.
The writing questionnaire was administered in a:
medium-sized anteroom next to the school office. When
approached by the researcher about a possible research
location, the principal had supplied this spacious,
brightly lit area, which was furnished with a low, round
table and eight chairs. The room had two large double
doors that, when closed, afforded the student respondent
and the researcher privacy.
*On this date, Teacher B declined to participate.
However, the pupils in her room continued to participate
in the study, and the researcher was able to collect their
writing samples and questionnaires and to conduct the
writing and reading interviews as planned.
75
The reading questionnaire sessions were mainly
conducted in the hallways, which were quiet after the
pupils had entered their classrooms. The two
kindergarteners and the two first graders were surveyed on
the first floor where their classrooms were located. The
six second and third graders completed their reading
questionnaires in the second-floor corridor of which their
classrooms were situated.
The students completed their writing questionnaires
on the following dates:
Student 1--kindergarten (a.m.) October 12, 1987
Student 2--kindergarten (p.m.) October 13, 1987
Student 3--first grade October 13, 1987
Student 4--first grade October 12, 1987
Student 5--second grade October 12, 1987
Student 6--second grade October 12, 1987
Student 7--third grade October 13, 1987
Student 8--third grade October 12, 1987
Student 9-dthird/fourth grade October 12, 1987
Student 10--third/fourth grade October 12, 1987
All ten children completed the reading surveys one week
later, on October 19, 1987.
Ingerviews. The district administrators’ interviews
were conducted at various times because of the relatively
flexible nature of their schedules. Although filled with
sundry administrative details, their work day is not as
constricting as that of a classroom teacher, who must
constantly supervise a group of children unless the
youngsters are with other supportive school personnel.
The interview times were arranged by telephone.
76
Because it is difficult to conduct an interview and
take notes simultaneously, the researcher requested and
received permission to tape record the interview sessions
with the three administrators. The first session, with
the Language Arts Coordinator, was slated for 8:00 a.m. on
October' 21, 1987, at. the district’s Instructional and
Staff Development Center. Later that morning, the
researcher interviewed the building principal in the
library of the research site. Both of these interviews
took place as scheduled. Due to a schedule mix-up, the
researcher was not informed that the Assistant
Superintendent for Elementary Education had cleared time
in his schedule for an interview the previous day. The
researcher learned of this confusion when she called the
administrator’s office on October 21. Thus, she made an
appointment with him for 11:15 a.m. and conducted the
interview that day. i
In an effort to save the administrators’ time and to
prevent possible loss of questionnaires, the writer
collected the completed questionnaires when she arrived
for the scheduled interviews.
After allowing teachers time to complete the
questionnaire, the researcher' began to arrange an
interview schedule. She drafted a form containing each
teacher’s name and room number. Then she made a grid
showing the days, dates, and time periods for art, music,
77
physical education, library, and morning teacher-
preparation period (8:10-8:40 a.m.). The teachers could
choose when they would like to be interviewed. These
forms were circulated during the week of October 12. The
interviews were scheduled as follows:
Teacher A--kindergarten Monday, October 19, 1987
9:30-10:00 a.m.
*Teacher B--first grade Monday, October 19, 1987
10:45-11:15 a.m.
Teacher C--second grade Friday, October 23, 1987
9:00-9:30 a.m.
Teacher D--third grade Friday, October 23, 1987
10:00-10:30 a.m.
Teacher E--third/fourth grade Friday, October 23, 1987
12:00-12:30 p.m.
The student interviews asked for the same information
as did the questionnaires. The interview procedure was
discussed earlier in this chapter.
Classrgom observetiene. Data were also collected
during 50 hours of observations in the participating
classrooms. A classroom-visitation calendar was developed
for each class after the teacher had indicated which
half-day period she taught writing. Each class was
observed for several hours each week, and the observation
data were duly recorded in the corresponding class log
*Teacher B declined to participate in the interview.
78
each day. Diagrams the researcher made of each of the
studied classrooms are included in Appendix E. The five
logs in which the researcher recorded the classroom-
observation data are described more fully in the next
section.
While collecting data, the researcher also looked for
conditions that affected the teaching and learning of
composition in each classroom. Examples of such
conditions are the time allotted to writing (Calkins,
1983: Farr & Daniels, 1986: Graves, 1983: Tway, 1984), the
emotional (Haley-James, 1981) and physical climate
(Calkins, 1983: Tiedt, 1975) of the classroom, the
availability (Graves, 1983: Tiedt, 1975) and suitability
of the writing-program materials, the importance of
writing as noted in the curriculum guides, and the amount
of emphasis the district placed on writing in relation to
the total curriculum. These conditions. are part of the
foundation of a successful writing program. However, the
primary method of analysis used in this study was the
framework or schema developed from Farr and Daniels
(1986).
s h s. For each of the five participating
classrooms observed, the writer purchased a large spiral-
bound notebook. These notebooks were divided into the
following three sections, into which the appropriate
79
elements were placed: "Classroom Observations,"
"District-Provided Materials,” and "Teacher-Provided
Materials." Inside the front cover of each notebook, the
researcher placed a class list (supplied by the principal
during the preliminary preparation period) and a calendar
noting all classroom observation times and dates for the
month of October 1987. (See Appendix G.) Inside the back
cover of each notebook, the researcher affixed a checklist
of the 15 key factors unique to effective writing
instruction, as developed by Farr and' Daniels (1986).
During the classroom observation periods, the researcher
checked whether the salient factor was observed ("+") or
not noted ("-"). A grid was also included, showing each
teacher’s/classroom’s observation dates.
The researcher brought the five notebooks to the
school with her each day and duly recorded the appropriate
notations.
gesearcner rield nores. The researcher kept an
ongoing journal of research field notes. She filled and
emptied this loose-leaf binder several times during the
months of data collection. Each time the researcher
emptied the journal, she organized, analyzed, and stored
its contents in large file boxes.
80
Summarx
The design and methodology of .the study were
presented in this chapter. The chapter began with
definitions of descriptive research, followed by a
description of the study setting. Procedures for
selecting the attendance center and the study participants
were also described. The research instruments and data-
gathering techniques were discussed in detail. Chapter IV
contains an analysis of the data gathered in this study.
CHAPTER IV
ANALYSIS OF THE DATA
Introgucrien
Chapter IV provides a detailed analysis of the
research data. The analysis is in four parts. Section
one contains a discussion of the data found in the various
documents collected by the writer. Information gleaned
from the three different questionnaires is contained in
part two. Interview data obtained from the administra-
tors, teachers, and students are included in section
three. The results of the classroom observations are
presented in section four.
Anaiysis of Coiiecteg Docunenrs
grate Curricnium guide for Writing
As of April 14, 1987, in response to a letter mailed
by the researcher, it was found that Michigan does not
have state teacher certification requirements for writing.
However, in October 1985, the Michigan State Board of
Education adopted a document written by the Michigan
Council of Teachers of English, entitled "Michigan
Essential Goals and Objectives for Writing." The eight-
page document includes a philosophy of writing based on
81
82
the latest in research and practice on the teaching of
composition, which stress using the 'writing process
(Graves, 1983) as the preferred method of writing
instruction. Objectives are given separately for the five
listed stages in the writing process: (a) prewriting, (b)
drafting, (c) revising, (4) proofreading, and (e)
publishing. A section on "Writing Instruction and its
Implications" is presented. Further section headings
include "Points to Consider in Evaluating a Writing
Program," "The Role of the Administrator in the Writing
Program," "The Role of the School Board in the Writing
Program," and a bibliography for the use of teachers,
administrators, school board members, and others
interested in the teaching of writing/composition in
Michigan public schools.
The 1983 Writing Educetion Ingerpretive Report,
sponsored by the Michigan Department of Education for the
Michigan Educational Assessment Program (MEAP), was
another publication analyzed by the researcher. The
document is addressed to the needs of all children and
does not single out minority students and their needs in
writing. The report presented the results of a statewide-
sample testing of the writing skills of pupils in grades
four, seven, and ten. The stated purpose of the testing
was "to gather reliable and useful information about what
students know and can do in the important communication
83
skill area of writing" (p. 1). Students in 18 schools
from 18 school districts across the state were tested.
The districts included both large, urban schools and
smaller ones.
The writing assignment consisted of two short timed
essays on expressive writing and persuasive writing, the
two primary traits selected. The use of language and
mechanics was selected as the secondary trait assessed in
this writing test sample.
The writing assessment results indicated that the
writing skills of the Michigan students sampled were very
poor and suggested that prompt remedial action was
required by all segments of the educational community as
well as society at large (see Appendix C: State
Documents).
District Curricuinn euigeiines
for Cenposirien
The Langnage Arts Currieulum guide for the school
district in this study, from which the following
objectives were taken, was developed during the 1982-83
school year. The goals of the language arts program of ,
the local school district studied are divided into nine
strands. The strands and the code letters for each are
listed as follows:
1. Grammar and Usage
2. Mechanics
3. Penmanship
“636)
84
4. Word Study WS
5. Reference and Study Skills RS
6. Literature Appreciation LA
*7. Composition C
8. Speaking and Listening SL
9. Spelling S
The ensuing section offers a description of the objectives
of the composition strands in the primary grades,
kindergarten through third.
Kingergnrren. In this school district, the kinder-
garten language arts objectives are defined in a separate
document entitled gingergarren Eduenrion Cnrriculnm
Guidelines. Listed under "cognitive objectives" is a
section labeled "representation." This section is further
subdivided into two parts: "Symbols" and "Language:
Signs." In the symbols category, the young child is
expected to be able to:
1. Use body to represent objects (pantomime).
2. Use objects to represent other objects.
3. Utter sounds to represent an object.
4. Create three dimensional models.
5. Create two dimensional representations.
The goals enumerated for the language level are:
l. The child will be able to name common objects in
the environment.
2. The child will be able to talk about the physical
world of immediate environment.
3. The child will be able to talk about people,
places, and events in immediate environment.
4. The child will be able to use language to solve
problems.
*Composition is only given as one strand. The
subskills of composition, spelling, handwriting, and so
on, are given equal status.
5.
6.
85
The child will be able to use language to draw
conclusions.
The child will be able to use language to make
generalizations. (p. 17)
In a passage marked "Reading: Resource/Literary
Strand," the kindergarten student is expected to:
l.
2.
3.
In
Respond with interest and enjoyment to orally pre-
sented material.
Recite simple nursery rhymes and poems with his
peers.
Participate in dramatizations of familiar stories
and/or rhymes. (p. 25)
reviewing the curriculum guidelines, the
researcher found no reference to the teaching of writing
or composition at the kindergarten level.
First grade. The behavioral objectives listed under
the "Composition" strand include:
1.
The student will develop pre-writing skills by:
dictating sentences, organizing class
experience stories, dictating personal stories
and illustrating stories.
The student will write a sentence.
The student will be introduced to techniques of
jproofreading: content, sentence structure,
grammar and usage, spelling, and mechanics.
Second grnde. Six objectives related to writing are
enumerated for pupils in this grade level. They include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The student will be exposed to pre-writing
skills: choosing a topic and writing a draft.
The student will write original sentences.
The student will be introduced to paragraph
construction: topic sentence, supporting sen-
tences, and sentence sequence.
The student will write original selections:
stories and poems.
The student will be introduced to the correct
form in writing: invitations, thank-you notes,
and friendly letters.
6.
86
The student will use the techniques of
proofreading: content, sentence structure, gram-
mar and usage, spelling, and mechanics.
wee. The seven writing goals specified for
the tertiary grade are that the student will:
1.
The
nature.
to teach
Practice pre-writing skills by: choosing and
narrowing a topic: gathering information, both
fact and opinion: taking notes: expanding the
vocabulary to include descriptive, sensory, and
appropriate words: and writing a rough draft.
Write original sentences: telling, questioning,
and explaining. '
Construct paragraphs using: topic sentence, sup-
porting sentences, sentence sequence, and transi-
tional words.
Write original selections: stories and poems.
Be introduced to the elements of a story:
setting, plot, and character analysis.
Use the correct form in writing: invitations,
thank-you notes, friendly and business letters,
addressing envelopes, and book reports.
Be introduced to techniques of proofreading:
content, sentence structure, grammar and usage,
spelling, mechanics, and revision.
curriculum guidelines are comprehensive in
However, no mention is made of how the teacher is
the objectives. The writing-process approach is
not addressed in this document.
During the 1986-87 school year, a committee called
the Language Arts Advisory Committee developed a new
language
district.
arts philosophy and a draft set of goals for the
The goals for the writing component of the
program are 3
1.
2.
Assist the students in the development of the
powers of comprehension, critical thinking, and
fluency in the expression of ideas.
Assist students in becoming responsible for what
they say and write.
87
3. Assist students in the acquisition of basic
skills, inquiry skills, and communication as
these relate to writing.
4. Identify and correct writing difficulties.
5. Assist students in understanding that writing is
thinking, and that thinking may be expressed and
clarified by writing.
6. Assist students in making language choices
wisely, that is, how things may be put and how
things should be and can be taken.
7. Develop and expand to the maximum the repertory
of language resources one can employ--from
vocabulary to punctuation, phrasing and sentence
structure, to style and dialect, points of view
and compositional form.
8. Develop and extend to the maximum the fluency,
facility, pleasure, and depth with which one can
write. .
9. Develop and expand to the maximum the range,
depth, and refinement of the inborn thinking
operations (classifying, generalizing, inferring,
and problem-solving) as they relate to writing.
The stated goals would seem to indicate a growing
awareness of the recent research that has been conducted
in the area of composition.
State- n at s
At this time, there are no spere-mangared tests for
composition. However, as mentioned before, the Michigan
State Board of Education has developed and pilot tested a
writing test for the Michigan Educational Assessment
Program (MEAP) . This test, for pupils in grades four,
seven, and ten, is available for reproduction and use by
local school districts throughout Michigan. An
assessment-administration manual for the aforementioned
grades is also available.
88
District-Mandated Tests
The local school district does not have a requirement
for the testing of composition at the primary grade
levels.
Commercial Meteriais Erovideg
by The Dietriet
At the kindergarten level, the local school district
provides, in addition to the regular classroom supplies,
14 "Big Books." These are very large, colorful books that
the teacher can place on a stand or easel, to use with a
group of children. The "Big Books" provided by the
district are:
l. Bridwell, Norman. Qlifford’s Femiiy.
2. Brown, Margaret Wise. Where Have Yon Seen?
3. Chase, Edith Newton, and Reid, Barbara. The New
Saby Calf
4. Field, Eugene. WynkenI Slynken, ang Nod.
5. Gelman, Rita Golden. Cets and Mice.
6. Gelman, Rita Golden. nore Spaghetti, I Say;
7. Gelman, Rita Golden. Tny Can’t T Ely?
8. Handy, Libby. pass for a Week.
9. Kalan, Robert. Sump, Ereg, Junp.
10. Lear, Edward. The Owl and the Pussycat.
ll. Matthews, Louise. Suncnes ang Sunenes of Bananas.
12. Oppenheim, Loanne, and Reid, Barbara. av o
Seen Birds?
13. Wells, Rosemary. Neiey Horn.
14. W.
Because writing and reading are two interchangeable,
closely related skills, using these books can become a
valuable part of prewriting activities and give children
listening experiences that enrich their intuitive
knowledge of written language.
89
Other than the established reading, language, and
spelling textbooks and reading workbooks, no materials are
provided for the teaching of composition in the other
grades. The teachers have ample paper supplies, pencils,
and crayons. Plenty of ditto paper is available for
reproducing worksheets for student use. A duplicating
machine was located in a small room next to the school
office and is used extensively by the teachers.
Commercial Materials Provided
py tne Tencner
'n r e . The kindergarten students received
writing instruction in a program based on a text purchased
by the teacher: Anne H. Adams, Mary L. Johnson, and
Judith M. Connors, uc s 'n d a d
Writing: Tne Readiness Coneept pf rne mrnre (Glenview,
111.: Good Year Books, 1980).
This program stresses a developmental approach to
teaching reading and writing to young children.
Youngsters should not be pushed into a rigid, formalized
program, the authors argue. Instead, they should be
allowed to develop at their own pace, drawing on the
wealth of literacy that they already know when they enter
the formal environment of the classroom. According to the
authors,
The Success program incorporates (l) the child’s
vocabulary, (2) printed words from familiar items in
the child’s environment, and (3) a flexible structure
90
that enables the teacher to develop program content
that 'varies each. day' based on student input.
Students improve their reading/writing abilities
almost as naturally as they once learned to speak and
listen. (p. ix)
For further clarification of the objective of
the program, the basic assumption is stated as follows:
"The Success in Kindergarten Reading and Writing program
is based on the assumption that reading and writing are
integral parts of a kindergarten student’s life and are
not separate entities apart from or foreign to the child"
(p. 1). This approach emphasizes a holistic view of young
children’s emergent literacy. It also recognizes that
young children have been exposed to a variety of
experiences within their print environment and have become
quite skilled language users before they enter the formal
school environment.
The basic assumption is stated at the beginning of
Chapter One, "Getting Ready to Teach the Success Program."
This chapter introduces the objectives, materials, and
other information that the classroom instructor needs to
implement the curriculum. Each succeeding chapter
discusses the module in depth, giving a more detailed
description of how to present the material to young
children. .
The program is divided into four basic modules. The
following excerpt from the text, ”Overview of Lesson
Components," best explains the rationale for each module:
91
The Success lessons are found in Appendix One,
and there is a lesson for each of 180 school days. A
lesson consists of three modules scheduled for
approximately twenty minutes each: Picture/Word
Association Module, Alphabet Module, Story Time
Module, and the Oral Language/Reading Module, taught
on an individual teacher-to-student basis at a
convenient time during each day.
Each module emphasizes a different approach to
introduce children to the knowledge of written letter
symbol combinations and comprehension of written
words, phrases, and sentences. Because the
approaches differ, provision is made in the program
for balance, reinforcement, and variety of
instruction. In addition, internal emphases within
each module change to incorporate new dimensions as
the kindergarten year progresses.
Here is how the modules differ, achieving the
balance and variety of components within the Success
program:
The Picture/Word Association Modules emphasize
the concept of reading words for tangible items, such
as "air conditioner vent, ears, brown," and
intangibles such as "love" and "sharing" associated
with pictures, instead of simply "reading pictures"
without an organized approach.
The Alphabet Modules, most of which are
correlated with art, emphasize the concept of writing
a sequence of letters to form words. The words are
volunteered from members of the class rather than
from a predetermined published list.
The Oral Language/Reading Modules emphasize the
concept of an individual child watching his or her
words being written and used in oral expressions by
another person. These modules are taught on an
individual teacher-to-student basis at any convenient
time during the school day.
The Story Time Modules emphasize the concept of
listening to an adult read stories while stressing
categories of words that the students hear in the
stories.
The four modules in the Success program
incorporate traditional reading/writing readiness
components, such as the use of pictures, art,
puppets, stories, and the students’ own self-
expressions. In addition, these modules provide a
base plan that correlates these components and
affords the expansion of their dimensions.
. . . Teacher expertise is highly valued in this
program. In fact, no two teachers will teach any
92
module exactly alike. Teachers should develop
the module in a teaching style comfortable to them
and enjoyable to the students. It is important,
however, that the base format of each module be
followed.
. . . The Success program recognizes the fact
that each teacher has the intelligence and expertise
to make unique contributions to improving the
instructional program. The base structure of the
Success modules [is] intended to make it easier for
teachers to incorporate activities into an
educationally sound framework that includes an
introduction to reading and writing. (pp. 1-3)
These four modules, encompassing Chapters Two through
Five, provide instructional guidelines for teachers.
The last chapter, Chapter Six, presents "Information for
Parents" who wish to provide constructive educational
activities for their children at home.
The Power Writing program, discussed later in this
chapter, was also named as a commercial resource in this
instructor’s writing program.
Rirsr grede. The teacher did not complete the
questionnaire, Part II of which was designed to focus on
the individual teacher’s writing program and materials.
Specifically, the following questions were asked:
9. Describe your writing program at this level.
10. What commercial curriculum materials are you cur-
rently using in the teaching of your writing
program?
11. What is your opinion of the usefulness of these
curriculum materials?
12. What teacher-made curriculum materials are you
currently using in the teaching of your writing
program?
93
13. What is your opinion of the usefulness of these
curriculum materials?
14. What changes or improvements would you like to
see in the writing program in this school in
1 year? 3 years? 5 years?
15. Additional comments:
During classroom observations, the researcher did not
note the use of any commercial materials beyond the
presence of the reading, spelling, and language workbooks
and the ordinary classroom materials (paper, pencils,
crayons) provided by the school district.
Seeond grnde. This teacher listed two commercial
resources on the questionnaire as forming the basis of her
classroom’s writing program: (a) the power writing
manual, Write for Bower, by J. E. Sparks: and (b) "Daily
Writing Activities," a set of duplicating masters
available from Frank Schaffer Publications. The
duplicating masters comprise story starters in a calendar
format designed to provide a child with a writing topic
for each day of the school year. The material is
available for grades one through four.
Tnirg_g_re_d_e. In addition to the spelling and
language textbooks used daily in the classrooms, the
teacher named the Power Writing manual as a resource. The
aspects of Power Writing that apply to grades two and
three are Stages 1-2-3 . . . Powergraph 122. Each stage
is comparable to a grade level, and mastery of Stage 1 is
94
required before moving to each successive stage. A
complete listing and description of each stage is given on
pages 99-103. Other commercial materials used in the
writing program were two collections of duplicating
masters, "Let’s Write Cursive" by Evelyn Randolph (Hayes
School Publishing Co., Inc.) and "Cursive Letters and
Numerals" published by the Milliken Publishing Company.
The teacher also listed Roens gnilgren Enjey (The
Instrucror) as an additional source.
Tnirdzfourtn-grage eombinarinn. Although this was a
third/fourth-grade combination room, the composition
program had not been divided into two separate and
distinct sections. However, the children observed during
the classroom visitations and selected for the interviews,
those who completed questionnaires, and those whose
writing samples were collected were third graders.
The classroom teacher had purchased two Frank
Schaffer publications, "Effective Writing Skills for
Grades 3-4" and "Learning to Write Paragraphs, Grades 3-
5." The lessons presented in these two resources
emphasize the mechanics involved in teaching composition.
In the former, pupils are guided in a step-by-step
procedure aimed at writing effective paragraphs,
developing proofreading skills, and improving their use of
punctuation and capitalization procedures. By answering
the five questions per worksheet page in five complete
95
sentences, the children are thus led into writing a
complete paragraph, which is the stated objective of this
packet of materials. The topics are preselected, and the
teacher has permission to photocopy the worksheets.
Examples of these worksheets are included in Appendix H.
Materiais nade py tne Teecner
Kindergarten. For the past two years, the
kindergarten instructor has used "Busy Books" with her
young pupils. These books are constructed of large, lined
"kindergarten-sized" paper stapled within two colorful
12" x 18" construction-paper sheets serving as covers (see
Appendix M).
The children write stories in these large booklets
and then illustrate their stories with a picture in the
space provided at the top of each sheet of paper.
Sometimes the teacher writes a word such as "caterpillar"
on the first line of each student’s book. Then the
children are to copy the word, write their story, and make
a drawing of the object. At other times, the children
choose their own topics and then write about the subject.
A seasonal theme or concept may serve as the impetus
for the compositions. During the month of October,
when the researcher was observing in the classroom, the
stimulus was the bulletin board decorated with the theme
of Halloween. Many of the young writers drew pictures of
96
ghosts, witches, pumpkins, skeletons, bats, and other
familiar objects associated with this time of year. Other
children drew pictures of their houses, families, and
themselves.
Every child in the classroom had his/her own "Busy
Book," but for purposes of classroom. management and
instructional objectives, only about six to eight
children worked at the writing center at any one time.
Ample supplies of pencils and crayons were supplied at the
center for students’ use and choices.
While these children worked at the writing center,
the remainder of the youngsters worked in small groups at
the other ten centers: (a) books, (b) puzzles,
(c) painting/easel, (d) snack, (e) listening, (f) art, (9)
surprise, (h) games, (1) science, and (j) the rice
station--the mathematics and science center where the
children engaged in various discovery activities, i.e.,
comparing different sizes and shapes; measuring volume
using different-sized containers of rice, sand, or water:
and so on.
Hanging tags, labeled and suspended from the
ceiling, designated each center of activity. The rice
station, however, was identified by a star. There was
also a large playroom with child-sized furniture and
97
appliances. It was supplied with toys, dishes, and other
objects to stimulate the children’s imaginations.
The "surprise" center usually had a prewriting
activity placed on the tables, which had room for four
children. During one afternoon observation session, the
observer noted the children working with clay dough and
plastic shapes of objects and numbers. They were busily
engaged in discussing topics for their writing, which was
to come later in the half-day session.
First grade. The first-grade teacher did not
complete the questionnaire or consent to the interview.
Second grede. No teacher-made curriculum materials
were employed in teaching the writing program.
Third grade. According to the answer to Item 12 on
the questionnaire, no teacher-made materials were employed
in teaching writing in the classroom. However, the
researcher noticed several cursive alphabet strips made of
oaktag placed on the round table at the back of the room.
These were not commercial materials: they were hand-made
strips with the upper- and lower-case letters of the
alphabet written on them--from Aa to 22 (see Appendix N,
which contains a facsimile of the material).
0 - t' . The teacher listed
seven folders that she constructed as a part of a Workshop
Way learning-center-concept inservice session that she
98
attended as the teacher-made writing curriculum materials
used in her program. These folders included:
1. Base Words--Write the base (root) word on the
line.
2. Counting--Write the numbers between the two num-
bers listed.
3. Homophones--Write a sentence using the homophones
of these words.
4. Likes/Opposites--Put [S] beside the pair of words
that mean the same and [O] beside the pair with
opposite meaning.
5. Money--How much money?
6. Multiple Meanings--Choose the best meaning for
the underlined word.
7. Writing Numbers--Write each number in word form.
Pilon (1979) described the Workshop Way as:
a system of education, a network of six elements
designed to nourish child development through the use
of content in classrooms. The six elements are: a.
physical environment created. so ‘that. peer
interpersonal relationships and willingness to risk
working will not be left to chance, a social
environment. created. so 'that the quality of "non-
threatening" will not be left to chance, a daily
self-concept vocabulary project, a daily whole class
personality lesson, parental involvement, and use of
time and content to safeguard human dignity during
learning and growing. All of this makes possible the
development of the whole child for all children, each
according to his/her own timing and way. (p. i)
The observer did not see the folders displayed or
used during this month-long phase of the data collection.
Although these materials were listed as curriculum
materials for the writing program, subsequent analysis
showed that they were not directly related to writing.
As a group, the three administrators expressed
concern about and great interest in the state of the
composition component of the district’s primary-grade
writing program. The school district was in the process
of changing its writing curriculum for the primary grades.
At the time of the study, each teacher developed his/her
own writing program and implemented it in the classroom.
As a result, there ‘was a lack of conformity and
cohesiveness in the writing curriculum. However, the
Power Writing program was being considered as the vehicle
for improving students’ writing skills and for providing
cohesion and structure throughout the district.
Power Writing, a writing theory developed by J. E.
Sparks (1982), is a highly structured approach to teaching
composition. The approach is based on a numerical system,
in which words, phrases, sentences, and paragraphs are
assigned a specific value or "power." The student is to
advance progressively through the 12 levels or stages as
he/she moves toward mastery of the stated objective of the
program, which is to become proficient in expository
writing.
100
According to Sparks,
Power Writing has two unique features:
1. Power Writing assigns a numerical value to words,
phrases, sentences, and paragraphs: lst power
for the main idea: 2nd power for a major detail:
3rd power for a minor detail: and other powers as
they explain preceding powers.
2. Power Writing divides the teaching of writing
into 12 stages, roughly comparable to grade
levels, starting with three-sentence paragraphs
and culminating in seven-paragraph essays. (p.
E5)
The different stages of Power Writing are explained
in the following paragraphs (Sparks, 1982):
stages 1-2-3 . . . Powergraph l 2 2
Students are given the lst Power sentence and
must add two 2nd Power sentences to complete a 3-
sentence paragraph.
Put the word LELO in the lst Power sentence
through Stage 7.
Vary the patterning of the lst Power sentence
given students.
Students must write two complete sentences with
periods and capital letters.
Stage 4 . . . Powergraph l 2 2
Students create their own lst Power sentence.
2nd Power transitions, signals, semaphores
Conventions 1-8
stage 5 . . . Powergraph l 2 3 2 3
3rd Power transitions
Conventions 1-9
Stage 6 . . . Powergraph l 2 3 2 3
Conventions l-lO
Stage 7 . . . Powergraph 1 2 3 2 3
Conventions 1-10
Sentence Patterns 1-6
Stage 8 . . . Powergraph l 2 3 2 3 2 3
Put the word rhree in lst Power sentences through
Stage 12.
Conventions 1-10
Sentence Patterns 1-12
Stage
ONNl-‘N
HUUNU
101
Moving the lst Power sentence to dif-
ferent positions
3 l
2 3 1
2 3
3
3 2 3
NNHUN
NOONNU
NNUQN
Conventions 1-10
Sentence Patterns 1-19
Stage 10 . . . Essay 1 2 2 2
Paragraph a Stage 8 at the lst power and each of
the 2nd Power sentences.
Conventions 1-10
Sentence Patterns 1-26
Stage 11 . . . Essay 1 2 2 2
Stage 10 expanded to a minimum of 3 sentences per
paragraph.
Conventions l-lO
Sentence Patterns 1-33
Stage 12 . . . Essay 1 2 3 2 3 2 3
Conventions l-lO
Sentence Patterns 1-39
Powerstorming
Powerstorming, or brainstorming, capitalizes upon
the vocabulary of Power. Providing opportunities for
thinking and talking before writing, it develops in
five steps.
1.
At the left margin of a sheet of notebook
paper, place a Power Idea. A Power Idea, a
group of words, furnishes the fecus for the
content of a paragraph.
Each Power Idea has a Power Word, the word
that will unlock the details. Underline the
Power Word.
In a brainstorming session, draw from stu-
dents a list of specific details from the
Power Word. The teacher writes these on the
board: students copy them. Try to have
everyone in the group contribute. Each
writer will need only two of these details to
start with, but he should have a variety of
choices. Note that these details will
contain most of the spelling words that the
student will use in writing his paragraph.
102
4. The teacher turns the Power Idea into a lst
Power Sentence and writes it under the notes.
Illustrate various ways to word this
sentence, a la patterning.
5. Students contribute the two 2nd Power Sen-
tences to complete a 3-sentence paragraph of
122. The teacher writes these on the board:
students copy them.
Teachers in every subject can do this
Powerstorming on any Power Idea. Powerstorming may
result in a model paragraph of any length: 122 -
12323 - 1232323 - Essay 1222.
Adyenrages of living in Century City:
1. shopping mall
2. high-rise apartment building
3. Century Plaza Hotel
4. outdoor concerts at ABC Center
5. restaurants
6. Shubert stage theatre
7. movie theatres
8. walking convenience
9. proximity to Beverly Hills, UCLA, LAX
10. nearness to ocean
Living in Century City has at least two
advantages. For one, the outdoor shopping mall
provides a pleasant place to spend a Sunday
afternoon. For another, the Shubert Theatre offers
the latest in Broadway musicals.
What two possible advantages. does living in
Century City provide?
With at least two conveniences, Century City
makes an ideal place to live.
If I had to select a Los Angeles suburb as a
place to live, I would choose Century City for two
reasons.
Century City, located just west of Beverly Hills,
offers two special advantages for Southern California
living. (pp. 126-28)
As with any program, Power Writing has its strengths
and weaknesses. The strength lies mainly in the fact that
it is a highly structured program, providing continuity
for the students’ writing progress. In his
"Prolegomenon" (a Greek term used by Sparks that means
"preface"), Sparks stated:
103
This book, W. develops five
concepts about Power Writing:
Power Writing assigns a numerical value to words,
phrases, sentences, and paragraphs: lst Power for
the main idea or topic sentence: 2nd Power for a
major detail: and 3rd Power for a minor detail.
Power Writing starts at mastery of a 3-sentence
paragraph and progresses, in easily-mastered 12
stages, to 7-paragraph essays. '
Power Writing teaches you to communicate ideas
through well-designed, simple, striking prose.
Power writing sharpens your writing skills with
practical techniques for achieving brevity, unity,
coherence,clarity,and action.
Power Writing strives for the goal of 100%
literacy.
This book, Write for Power, emphasizes three
special features of Power Writing:
Power Writing will review all of the grammar and
punctuation that you will need to reach the goal of
100% literacy.
Power Writing will teach you to use effectively
39 Sentence Patterns that will help you to write
precisely what you mean.
Power Writing will provide stage-by-stage
personal guidance in development of your
individualistic style. (p. vi)
The major weakness of Power Writing is that it is too
highly structured. Writers need flexibility in choice of
topics, time, and problem solving in order to exercise
their creativity during the composing process. Another
weakness of the program is the limitation of the writer to
just three sentences during the early stages. Writers
should be allowed to write as much as they want on a topic
of their own choosing.
An examination of Sparks's "Enchiridion of
Conventions of Form and Literacy" (p. 129) yields further
data about the differences between Power Writing and
process writing. The ten conventions, the first eight of
104
which should be mastered as part of Stage 4, are as
follows:
1. Use ink.
2. Have one-inch margins on all four sides of the
paper.
3. Control neatness (no crossouts or ink erasures).
4. Indent the opening sentence of a Powergraph one
inch.
5. Write complete sentences.
6. Use proper grammar.
7. Spell correctly.
8. Punctuate properly.
9. Eliminate the word "there" from the beginning of
a sentence.
10. De-emphasize the use of the verb "to be": is,
am, are, was, were, be, being, been.
These differences can also be construed as weaknesses
of Power Writing because they can impose constraints on
the writer. By contrast, process writing approaches
suggest that getting ideas down on paper should be
emphasized first, especially with inexperienced writers.
Concern with forms and conventions will come later as the
work is prepared for publication (Calkins, 1983, 1986:
Graves, 1983: Murray, 1985).
105
One administrator expressed concern that the program
may be too structured. Additional concerns administrators
expressed included lack of teacher preparation for
teaching composition, lack of time for writing practice in
the daily classroom schedule, and a lack of articulation
about writing between elementary and secondary
instructors. Another problem mentioned by one adminis-
trator was the lack of minute correction of errors on
composition papers, yet authorities in composition would
not agree that children's writing should be corrected
(Farr & Daniels, 1986). The specific responses noted on
the questionnaire are as follows:
Administrator 1 said:
There are several weaknesses in the writing program.
The first is a lack of consistency in the writing
curriculum across the district. The second is a lack
of formal teacher preparation both in terms of their
own writing competence and of their preparedness to
teach writing. The third is a lack of time for
practicing writing. Plus there is not an assessment
of writing related to the instructional techniques
used in the primary grade classrooms.
Administrator 2 commented:
I think it would benefit both programs [secondary and
primary] for members of each group to sit down and
find commonalities between the programs (I think
there are many). I also feel a meeting would allow
the members to articulate the flow of these portions
of the curriculum.
Administrator 3 said:
Most written work done by students is not carefully
checked for errors. The writing of students is not
monitored as math problems are.
106
Future plans for improving writing throughout the
school district included providing teacher inservice
sessions at the Instructional and Staff Development
Center, integrating writing instruction into all the
district's special programs (bilingual education,
compensatory education, gifted education, special
education, and so on), providing opportunities for more
student participation in worthwhile district-initiated
writing activities such as Books by Kids, and developing a
local recognition program for outstanding writing teachers
as well as for excellent student writers. The district
also planned to investigate and implement a program to
assess children's writing at the primary level.
Teacher Questionneires
The questionnaire designed for the teachers was in
two parts. The major objective of part one was to gather
data about the teachers' writing background and training
in the teaching of composition.
The teachers' elementary school teaching experience
ranged from three years to nine years: the mean number of
years of teaching experience was 6.8. The highest degree
earned was the bachelor's degree (see Table 2), although
two teachers had taken more classes beyond the
baccalaureate degree.
107
Table 2.--Overview of participating teachers.
Highest Number
Teacher Degree Grade(s) of Years
Participant Earned Taught of Teaching
A B.S. Kindergarten 7.5
B First
C B.A. Second 3.0
D B.S. Third 9.0
E B.S. Third/fourth 8.0
Only two of the teachers who responded to the
questionnaire had had any preparation for teaching
composition. One instructor had had 12 hours of
undergraduate course work in writing. The other had had
four credit hours of undergraduate writing courses.
Neither of the two respondents had had any graduate
preparation in teaching composition.
In response to the item concerning attendance at
inservice and conference sessions, one teacher listed a
Power Writing training session. Another anticipated
attending the training on Power Writing in the near
future. Although the actual sessions were not specified,
the terms "6 hrs." and "1" were written in the answer
spaces by the two remaining teachers who completed the
questionnaire.
Part two of the teacher questionnaire was designed to
obtain a description of the instructors’ writing program
108
objectives and the materials used for each of the primary
grades, kindergarten through three. As stated before,
each teacher had her own individualized writing program.
Some of the responses garnered from the questionnaire
included:
Classroom 1: "Oral language, letter’ identifica-
(Kindergarten) tion and formation, independent
writing"
Classroom 2: No response
(First grade)
Classroom 3: "I have a book called W ' '
(Second grade) Power that the district furnished."
Classroom 4: "We don't have a writing program as
(Third grade) such. However, I'm using commercial
materials: spelling textbooks, lan—
guage textbooks, and power of writ-
ing (district provided)."
Classroom 5: "Currently, we are writing sentences
(Third/fourth and are developing these sentences
grade) into paragraphs."
From the variety of responses, one may conclude that
the composition program was indeed diverse. One of the
two teachers who had received some training in teaching
composition showed rudimentary knowledge about children’s
oral language development and saw oral language
development related to written composition. The
researcher substantiated this statement during the
classroom observation sessions. The teacher (Teacher A)
often spoke of writing in terms of what she had learned in
a recent graduate course. She planned future activities,
109
both prewriting and writing, for the young children in her
charge.
The other teacher (Teacher E), who had had some
additional graduate course work in writing, concentrated
mainly on the mechanics of composition. She relied quite
heavily on the use of worksheets to help her pupils
compose more effective sentences and paragraphs. This was
in keeping with the stated goals of the instructional
leader of that school, who wanted to see improvements in
the children’s sentence and paragraph structure as well as
increased proficiency in expository writing in the primary
and upper grades.
The other instructors were also vitally interested in
teaching their pupils the rudiments of the writing craft.
Teachers A, C, D, and E listed commercial materials that
they had purchased and used extensively with their pupils
to improve their writing, which could be construed to
indicate their continuing interest in their pupils’
writing growth.
Questionnaire responses to Question 14, "What changes
or improvements would you like to see in the writing
program in this school in: 1 year? 3 years? 5 years?"
included a desire on the part of Teacher D for "a writing
textbook for each student." Teacher E’s response to the
same question was:
110
I would like to make sure each student can write a
complete sentence which will later result into a
complete paragraph before passing to the next grade
with 80% accuracy. I’d like to see students writing
with ease within this period of time [3 years].
Wigwam
Ten students, two from each classroom, were selected
to respond to the questionnaires. The ten students
selected, as well as the majority of the pupils enrolled
in the school during the time of the study, were black.
For purposes of anonymity, the five boys were assigned
student numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. The five girls were
given even numbers: 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 (see Table 3).
The purpose of the student questionnaires was to elicit
data about the children’s feelings and attitudes toward
writing.
Table 3.--Designations of pupil participants.
Teacher Grade(s) Student
Participant Taught Numbers
A Kindergarten l and 2
B First 3 and 4
C Second 5 and 6
D Third 7 and 8
E Third/fourth 9 and lo
111
On the whole, the children exhibited positive
feelings toward writing. In fact, each of the ten
students responded "Yes,” without further elaboration, to
Question 1, "Do you like to write?” However, their
perceptions of writing were based primarily on what
learned students of composition would call "handwriting."
Very few of the youngsters studied spoke positively of
writing as an act of composition--a writing down or
recording of one’s thoughts. To them, writing was
basically an exercise of "letter practice." One might say
that the students’ perceptions of writing were composed
mainly of three things: (a) practicing the formation of
letters, both manuscript and cursive: (b) finishing story-
starters and paragraphs furnished in the spelling and
language textbooks: and (c) completing commercial
worksheets.
Tables 4 and 5 list the ten students’ responses to
Item 5: "How often do you write at school?" and Item 6:
"How often do you write at home?" It appears that the
majority of the respondents did most of what they
perceived as "writing” at school. Two of the children’s
answers (Students 5 and 6) seem to indicate a lack of
perception or understanding about the question. They did
not clarify their answers, however.
Table 4.--Pupils’ responses to Item 5:
112
write at school?"
”How often do you
Pupil Grade Gender Response
1 K Male "5 times"
2 K Female "2 times"
3 1 Male "About an hour"
4 1 Female ”A lot"
5 2 Male "I dot no"a
6 2 Female "Lot"
7 3 Male "11 times”
8 3 Female "To 3:00"
9b 3 Male "A lot’s of times"
10b 3 Female "A lot"
Table 5.--Pupils’ responses to Item 6:
aChild’s spelling.
bThird/fourth-grade combination classroom.
write at home?"
"How often do you
Pupil Grade Gender Response
1 K Male ”3"
2 K Female "3 times"
3 1 Male "10 minutes"
4 1 Female "Only a little"
5 2 Male ”Good"
6 2 Female "Any"
7 3 Male "When I write
homework"
8 3 Female "In the night"
9a 3 Male "In the night"
10a 3 Female "None"
aThird/fourth-grade combination classroom.
113
Because of the interrelated nature of writing and
reading (Lundsteen, 1979) , the researcher included four
questions on the questionnaire to obtain information about
the students’ reading habits and feelings about reading.
These questions paralleled those asked about writing.
They were: "Do you like to read?" (Item 9), "What kinds
of books do you like to read?" (Item 10), "Do you read at
home? When?" (Item 11) , and "Do you read at school?
When?" (Item 12).
All ten students responded affirmatively to the
question concerning whether they liked to read. library
books were the favorite books of six of the children,
whereas three pupils chose their reading textbooks as
their favorite source of reading material. Student 10
preferred to read "cartoon books" during her leisure time.
Most. of ‘the respondents indicated that the afternoon,
right after school, was when they spent time reading at
home.
The pupils’ responses to Item 12, "Do you read at
school? When?" are shown in Table 6. To give a more
precise picture of the students’ ideas about reading at
school, their responses are cited verbatim--as the second
and third graders wrote them on the questionnaires and as
the kindergartners and first graders dictated them to the
researcher.
114
Table 6.--Pupils’ responses to Item 12: "Do you read at
school? When?"
Pupil Grade Gender
Response
l K Hale
2 K Female
3 1 Male
4 1 Female
5 2 Male
6 2 Female
7 3 Male
8 3 Female
9a 3 Male
10a 3 Female
"Yes. I read over there
[pointing to Book Corner] when
we get in."
"Yes."
"Yes, when it’s time to--
reading time."
"Yes, when we get a little
homework."
"Yes, in the morning."
"Yes, in the morning."
"Yes, after I get through with
my work."
"Yes, in reading class."
"Yep, when I don’t have nothing
to do."
"Yes, at reading time and when
I come in to my seat."
aThird/fourth grade combination classroom.
As noted before, every child had a positive response
to reading, although two of them (Pupils 3 and 8) seemed
to associate reading solely with the reading class. A
third child (Pupil lO) expressed ambivalence about knowing
what "reading" meant.
The first part of her answer
clearly showed that she associated reading with a specific
115
class period (reading time). However, the rest of her
response indicated that she knew that reading could be
done at times other than the scheduled time periods. Her
differentiated response may indicate she had a clearer
perception than the other respondents of what reading is.
Pupils l, 7, and ,9 showed an inclination to classify
reading as a "leisure" activity, something to do when
other class work was finished.
The responses of Pupils 5 and 6--"Yes, in the
morning"--may mean the children also associated reading
with the reading class. Reading was usually the first
subject taught in the mornings. Although some
researchers disagree (Davis, 1987) it is generally thought
that children are able to respond better to reading
instruction when they have had a good night’s sleep and
have eaten breakfast. Pupil 4 indicated that the amount
of assigned homework influenced her reading time ( "Yes,
when we get a little homework"). Pupil 2, a
kindergartner, did not elaborate on her answer.
This portion of the study allowed the researcher to
seek further information from administrators about answers
to questions on the written survey. Part one (Questions 1
116
and 2) gave the respondents an opportunity to expand their
answers or to add a specific point(s) that they thought
was relative to the study as it affected writing at the
building or district level.
Only one respondent expanded on Question 1: that
involved the implementation of the Power Writing program.
Strengths and weaknesses of the program were addressed on
the questionnaire. The additional notation was the
expressed concern that more dialogue and articulation were
needed between teachers at the elementary level and those
at the secondary level of instruction (K-6 and 7-12). The
response was, in part:
There had been no articulation between the elementary
and secondary as to what was going on, and probably
the weakness that is going to be most problematic is
the articulation. I don’t think there’s really a
problem with continuity with K-6 to 7-12, but it
would be nice if there had been some discussion as to
what was going to happen before, so that everybody
could be ready and in place, philosophically,
together.
Part two of the interview sought to ascertain
administrators’ knowledge of current research and
practices relative to the study of composition. Only five
questions were addressed, and all three administrators
were asked identical questions. The only variable was
that for two of the administrators, the Assistant
Superintendent for Elementary Education and the Language
Arts Coordinator, the questions were geared for district-
wide analysis. The third administrator, the principal,
117
was asked the questions as they pertained to the building
he supervised. The five items were chosen because,
although specific, they still applied to a general
analysis of a school district’s writing program and to the
writing curriculum of a particular building. All 15 of
the essential factors listed by Farr and Daniels (1986),
which form the foundation of this study, pertained to the
classroom teachers’ work as they interact with their
pupils. This information is discussed later in the
chapter.
The remainder of this section contains a discussion
of the administrators’ responses to the five questions
posed in part two of the interview.
Question 1 was, "Do you understand and appreciate the
basic linguistic competence that young children bring with
them to school, and have positive expectations for young
children’s achievements in writing?" All of the
administrators answered this question affirmatively. They
expected that students in the participating building as
well as young children in the entire district would
achieve greater proficiency in writing. The Power Writing
program, which was being implemented at the primary-grade
level throughout the district, was viewed as the chief
means to achieve this goal.
118
Question 2 asked, "Are the primary-grade children in
the district/your building provided with sufficient time
to practice their writing?" The answers were affirmative.
Two respondents again mentioned Power Writing as the chief
means of obtaining and maintaining this objective. The
daily use of the spelling, language, and'reading textbooks
provided ample time for creative writing, according to the
third administrator.
Question 3 was, "Do the primary-grade children in the
district/your building have the opportunity to write for a
variety of audiences?" All three administrators thought
that the primary-grade children had many opportunities to
write for different audiences. Mention was made of
the children’s participating in a pen pal activity with
students in other school districts. This activity, while
beneficial to all students, will be particularly good for
the nonmainstream children in this urban school district
if they can correspond with mainstream children in a
suburban district. Their teachers can use the activity to
help the children, who may be employing dialectical usages
in their writing, to "correct" or change these differences
into the Standard English used by their pen pals. The
learning accomplished through this writing activity will
be more lasting because the children learn as they do
something they enjoy.
119
Other audiences the administrators mentioned included
parents, grandparents, and other family members: various
politicians; community leaders: classmates and other
children in the building: and known and unknown audiences
in various local, state, and national writing contests.
Question 4 asked, "Are workbooks and ditto sheets
used in the district/your building to teach writing
mechanics and grammar, or are the children’s own
compositions employed for this purpose?" Historically, at
both the district and the building levels, the teachers
had used workbooks and ditto sheetsto teach young
children the mechanics of writing and grammar. At the
time of the study, however, there was increasing use of
the children’s own compositions, which is in keeping with
the latest research on writing. One administrator
expressed this view. Another stated that although both
commercial materials (workbooks and ditto sheets) and the
students’ original compositions were used, the primary
emphasis was on the children’s own compositions. The
third administrator reported that the teachers used ditto
sheets to teach grammar and writing mechanics, a fact that
was verified in this study.
Question 5 asked, "Has writing been made an integral
part of the entire curriculum, not just in the language
arts?" The administrators generally thought that writing
had been integrated into the entire school curriculum. In
120
the researcher’s data, however, few "other" writings,
those not written as a class assignment, were filed in the
children’s writing folders. This finding is discussed
more fully in the Analysis of Classroom Observation Data
section under Factor 15.
Ieaehe; Iggezyiewe
As in the administrator interviews, Question 1 ("Is
there any answer from the questionnaire that you would
like to expand?") and Question 2 ("Is there anything
concerning the writing program that you would like to add
or discuss that was not covered or mentioned on the
questionnaire?") were intended to give the teacher
interviewees an opportunity to answer a question in more
detail or to add information germane to the study of
composition.
The other two introductory questions were designed to
supply different data. Question 3 requested additional
information about the teacher’s background and early
personal experiences with writing: "How did you learn to
write?" The item "Describe how you would teach a class of
children to write if you didn’t have any restraints--an
ideal situation" sought data about the teacher’s personal
ideas about writing and the teaching of composition.
Teachers voiced two needs in part one of the
interview: (a) the desire for a writing textbook to teach
121
writing in an orderly fashion and (b) the need for a
writing curriculum. It was generally thought that there
was no district-wide writing program--each instructor
designed and taught her own curriculum.
Responses to Question 3 yielded little additional
information. The teachers remembered having received
traditional instruction in writing (i.e., handwriting
instruction). They had done very little creative writing
in school, a fact that follows the national norm then and
now (Applebee, 1981: NAEP, 1981).
Responses to Question 4 revealed that the teachers
would ideally conduct their writing programs basically the
way they were doing at the time of the study.
The 15 questions asked in part two of the interview
were adapted from Farr and Daniels’ 8 W
d W ‘ ' st (1986) and were intended to elicit
data about the participating teachers’ knowledge of the
current research and practices in writing instruction.
These factors provided the theoretical or conceptual
framework for data analysis. The checklist shown in Table
7 was compiled from the teachers’ answers to the interview
questions. It represents the teachers’ perceptions of how
much they knew about recent research and practices in
writing instruction. In the section entitled Analysis of
Classroom Observation Data as Corroborated by the 15 Key
Table 7.--Fifteen factors checklist:
JJZZ
teachers’ perceptions.
Factor
A
(K)
Classroom
3
(1)
c
(2)
n
(3)
E
(3/4)
Teachers who understand and appre-
ciate the basic linguistic compe-
tence that students bring with them
to school, and who therefore have
positive expectations for students’
achievements in writing.
Regular and substantial practice in
writing, aimed at developing fluency.
The opportunity to write for real,
personally significant purposes.
Experience in writing for a wide
range of audiences, both inside
and outside of school.
Rich and continuous reading expe-
rience, including both published
literature of acknowledged merit
and the work of peers and
instructors.
Exposure to models of writing in
process and writers at work, includ-
ing both teachers and classmates.
Instruction in the processes of
writing: that is, learning to work
at a given writing task in approp-
riate phases, including pre-
writing, drafting, and revising.
Collaborative activities for stu-
dents that provide ideas for writing
and guidance for revising works in
progress.
123
Table 7.--Continued.
Classroom
3 C E
Factor A D
(K) (1) (2) (3) (3/4)
9. One-to-one writing conferences
with the teacher. + - + +
10. Direct instruction in specific
strategies and techniques for - + + —
writing.
11. Reduced instruction in grammatical
terminology and related drills, - + + +
with increased use of sentence
combining activities.
12. Teaching of writing mechanics and
grammar in the context of stu-
dents’ actual compositions, rather + - + +
than in separate drills or exer-
cises.
13. Moderate marking of surface struc- ‘
ture errors, focusing on sets or + - + +
patterns of related errors.
14. Flexible and cumulative evaluation
of student writing that stresses
revision and is sensitive to varia- - - + -
tions in subject, audience, and
purpose.
15. Practicing and using writing as a
tool of learning in all subjects + - + +
in the curriculum, not just in
English.
Note: The 15 factors were taken verbatim from Marcia Farr and Harvey
Dani-ls. W (Urbana.
111.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1986).
Key: + . Belief that factor was present in her classroom.
- = Belief that factor was not present in her classroom.
124
Factors Associated With Effective Writing Instruction, the
data are discussed in detail.
tu e t w
All ten of the children who were interviewed
responded positively to the question, "Do you like to
write?" However, it became clear as the interviews
progressed that some children had no clear idea of what
writing is or of what makes a good writer. There was some
confusion about the difference between writing as a
composing process and the practice of handwriting as
penmanship. Some of the responses to the question "What
kinds of writing do you like to do?" illustrate this
dichotomy:
Student 3: "Number writing, spelling"
Student 4: "Like to draw pictures, like to write my
ABC's"
Student 5: "A, B, C"
Student 7: "Math"
Of the other children’ 8 responses, only Student 8
indicated some knowledge of what writing is:
Student 1: "I like to write dogs and make men, draw
my mama and color my whole family"
Student 2: "Write a house: make a little girl"
Student 6: "Draw"
Student 8: "Story"
125
Student 9: "Drawing pictures"
Student 10: "Drawing pictures"
Student 4 presented an interesting contrast in that
the first part of her answer ("like to draw pictures")
reflected part of the writing that she had done in her
classroom. She, a first grader, and her classmates had
drawn pictures and then dictated a sentence about them to
the teacher as part of a language experience lesson (see
Appendix F). The second part of her response ("like to
write my ABC’s") reflects the emphasis placed on
handwriting, an emphasis noted in all of the classrooms
studied.
Interestingly, all ten students said "yes," they were
good writers (Question 4), even though they could not
describe with certainty the qualities or attributes that
constitute a good writer. Host of the answers reflected
some aspect of the handwriting process. Student 4 gave a
typical answer: "Because when I get some paper, I don’t
go out of the lines, and I trace."
The children studied had pencils in their hands most
of the school day, but they were "writing" as a means of
completing written assignments from their textbooks:
practicing the alphabet: writing words for numbers, days
of the week, 'and months of the year: and completing
workbook pages and worksheets requiring one or two words
for each question (and sometimes sentences) reproduced
126
from commercial materials. In both the questionnaires and
the interviews, the pupils said they wrote "a lot." In
response to Question 5, "How often do you write at
school?" a third grader (Student 8) wrote on her
questionnaire that she wrote "to 3:00."
On only two occasions, the researcher heard teachers
give students the assignment to write an original story.
According to the interview and questionnaire responses,
however, the children thought that they were writing "all
day," which they were, in a broad sense of the word.
ADAWMW
rateg 9y ghe 15 Key Feetors Associeged
Wit E e 'v i ' s n
In this section, each of the '15 key factors
associated with effective writing instruction (Farr &
Daniels, 1986) is restated and then correlated with the
research data.
Factor 1
Teachers who understand and appreciate the basic
linguistic competence that students bring with them
to school, and who therefore have positive
expectations for students’ achievements in writing.
Teachers’ acceptance of the pupils in their charge
was evident in all five classrooms studied. The
researcher noticed neither overt nor covert rejection of
children during the 75 hours spent in classroom
observations and interview sessions. Four of these female
127
teachers were black and the majority of their pupils were
also black: race identity' may‘ have lbeen a factor
contributing to this acceptance. The kindergarten
teacher, a white female, however, was very warm and
accepting of her young pupils, who were also black.
In response to Question 6 on the questionnaire, which
concerned dialect, each responding teacher said she could
not speak. a dialect other than Standard English.
Evidently, they were not aware that everyone speaks a
dialect (Perrin, 1972).
In conjunction with Question 6, Question 7 asked if
this dialect was used with the children. The respondents
said "No." If the teachers were unaware that they did
indeed speak a dialect, perhaps they would not realize or
recognize when they were using that dialect.
According to the responses to Question 8, none of the
teachers had had any training in dialect differences and
their influence on young children’s learning. Without
some knowledge about the linguistic research done in the
area of nonstandard dialects, instructors would find it
difficult to distinguish dialectical rules and forms in
the children’s speech patterns and written compositions.
Thus, the teacher acceptance that the researcher
observed was primarily their acceptance of the
personalities of the young children themselves. Research
128
about effective schools has shown the importance of
teacher acceptance and high expectations in the teaching
of young children (Brookover et al., 1982).
To reiterate, although some of the children spoke and
wrote with a marked dialectical pattern, the researcher
observed no negative responses to those linguistic
differences. In faCt, she noted that some of the teachers
exhibited the same dialectical patterns spoken by their
students.
Fac r
Regular and substantial practice in writing, aimed at
developing fluency.
Three of the stated future goals for the writing
program in this school were that students improve their
composition skills in the following areas within the
stated time frame: (a) "better sentence structure at all
grade levels" (one year), (b) "better paragraph structure
at all grade levels" (three years), and (c) "more
expository writing at all grade levels" (five years).
Because these were building-wide goals, the primary grades
were naturally included in this plan for writing
improvement.
To achieve this goal, various means were observed,
most notably the use of the spelling, language, and
reading textbooks at the second- and third-grade levels.
Each spelling text has 36 lessons. Six of these (6, 12,
129
18, 24, 30, and 36) are review lessons, which have a
"story-starter" under the "proofreading" section. The
remaining 30 lessons provide for writing in a section
entitled "Let’s Write." In this section, children are
required to finish a story in which the idea or first
sentence is given. Sometimes they are. asked to use as
many of their spelling words as possible in their stories.
A complete story is occasionally given, and the children
are required to write and use their own words to fill in
the blanks in the story. At other times, the pupils are
told to write one sentence on a given topic or to write a
two-line rhyme using word pairs that are supplied.
The language textbooks for grades two and three are
organized into units: each unit has a series of lessons on
composition. The lessons are intended to develop
students’ skills in ‘writing sentences, paragraphs,
stories, and book reports. The assignments are highly
organized, and the children complete the lessons as
instructed.
No provisions were made for the teaching of writing
(no section marked "writing" or "composition") in the
teachers’ editions of the early basal readers. At this
level, writing was accomplished mainly through the several
workbook pages that followed each story. Each student had
his/her own reader and workbook. The higher level readers
130
had numerous lessons for writing compositions. For
example, the researcher reviewed each of the teacher
editions thoroughly and found, beginning in Level 10
(grade three), the following pages on which composition
lessons were featured: T-64, T-152, T-156, T-185, T-212,
T-228, T-252, T-255, T-260, T-288, T-318, T-367, T-368, T-
370, T-381, T-383, T-422, and T-442.
The teachers’ manual for the Level 11 basal reader is
divided into two volumes for easier handling. Volume one,
in use in the third-grade and third/fourth-grade
combination classrooms during the period of observation,
contained four pupil lessons on composition and one page
for the instructor on teaching composition. volume two,
which the children would use later in the school year, had
ten pupil lessons on composition.
The teachers also made extensive use of commercial
duplicating materials as a means of teaching writing. In
these lessons, students were required to "compose"
paragraphs based on answers to lead questions in which, if
the student followed the written directions, he/she would
eventually write a complete paragraph. (See Appendix F:
Samples of Children’s Writing, By Grade Level--Student 9:
Worksheet entitled "You are the teacher.") Other ditto
sheets filed in the students’ writing folders were
actually handwriting practice sheets. Some of these
sheets allowed youngsters to practice the basic
131
handwriting strokes, such as slant lines and circles.
Others required the children to practice certain letters
of the alphabet.
Table 8 shows the kinds and quantities of writing
materials that were filed in the writing folders. An
explanation of each category follows:
1. Drawing: Any original art work done by the
child.
2. Handwriting: Papers with basic handwriting
strokes and letters of the alphabet.
3. Language: Papers based on assignments from the
language textbook.
4. Other: Papers labeled with the names of other
subjects: newspaper clippings with letters of the alphabet
circled on them.
5. Reading: Papers based on reading assignments.
6. Spelling: Papers with lists of spelling words or
sentences on them.
7. Story: An original composition.
8. Worksheet: Commercial materials duplicated by
the teacher and completed by the child.
The researcher observed different activities in the
kindergarten and first-grade rooms. On Monday, October 5,
the morning kindergarten class was learning about
the letter "p." The 24 children were seated in three rows
132
mN o m o o m o o m cH
HN o NN o N HN o o m a
v H m H o m N o m m
m o m H H H N H m b
N m N o m 0H m H N m
H v m m m v m o N m
o o o o o o o v H v
o o o o o o o m H m
o o o o H o w o M N
o o o o H o m o m H
wmwuw ..o.m -.mem -mmwx ....o .WMMM .mwwwm. -www. ....o ......m
.mmHoEmm osHuHus acmHoMMHo mo HonEsZII.m OHQmB
133
on the rug in front of the teacher, who was seated on a
chair. At her side was a chart stand with a large piece
of newsprint tacked to it. She had drawn a picture of a
pickle and led the discussion about the beginning sound of
the word "pickle." Then she made a "p" in one corner of
the paper: first a circle and then a straight line.
After further discussion, she made three more "p’s," each
in another corner of the paper.
For a warm-up activity, the children watched the
teacher pantomime an imaginary "p" in the air with her
forefinger. Then they stood up and made imaginary "p’s"
in the air with their forefingers. The teacher moved to
the side of the rows and told the children to stand up,
turn around, and face her. She told them, "I want you to
practice writing a "p" with your finger on the back of the
child in front of you." The children did so. Then they
were told to turn in the other direction and make a "p" on
the back of the other child.
After further discussion, the teacher pointed to the
picture of a pickle and asked if the children understood
what they were to do. Several children raised their
hands. One answered that they had to make a picture of
the pickle and then make a "p" on their paper. The
students were instructed to return to their work tables
and complete the lesson. At each child’s seat, the
134
teacher had placed a piece of lined paper and a crayon.
The children began working as the teacher circulated
around the room, helping some children and checking each
pupil’ s paper. After the teacher had checked a child’s
paper, he/she could then turn the paper over and draw a
picture. (See Appendix F: Samples of Children’s Writing,
By Grade Level: Kindergarten, Students 1 and 2, for
examples of this exercise.)
At 9:17 a.m., the teacher rang a small bell. The
children stopped and said in unison, "Stop, look, and
listen," which apparently was this teacher’s signal for
getting her students’ attention. Then the teacher
announced that the children had about three more minutes
to finish their "p’s." Proceeding to the listening
center, the instructor put on a recording of a familiar
nursery rhyme. The children completed their assignment,
singing along with the record as the teacher moved around
the room and collected the papers. At 9:22 a.m. , the
children returned to the rug area for another activity.
In a succeeding episode (Thursday, October 29), the
21 pupils present in the afternoon kindergarten session
were seated on the rug in front of their teacher, who was
teaching them about the letter "u." After discussion, the
children returned to their seats. At each place, the
teacher had placed a 6" x 6" newspaper clipping and a
fine—point felt-tip marker. The children were to find and
135
circle all the "u’s" on the piece of newspaper. The
activity ended at 12:53 p.m.
Children in the first grade drew pictures of assigned
themes and either printed the ideas on the paper
themselves or had the teacher write the sentence for them.
For example, the reading and spelling workbooks provided
the impetus for the class assignment on Tuesday,
October 6. The episode can best be illustrated by reading
the notes the researcher made in one of her logs:
9:21 a.m.: Children were instructed to look at page
13 in their spelling workbook. Teacher
told students that they were not to write
in the books yet. The lesson was on the
"Nn." Teacher demonstrated "Nn" on the
chalkboard.
9:25 a.m.: Teacher went to cupboard to take out
reading workbooks, passed them out, and
instructed students to close spelling
books. [From 9:03 a.m. to 9:21 a.m., the
class had been reviewing the "Tt."] "We
are studying the "n" sound."
9:31 a.ma: Children were directed to put everything
in their desks except their reading
books. [Rationale stated for not writing
in workbooks was that students did not
know how to make their alphabet letters
yet. Ditto sheets were used exten-
sively.]
9:38 a.m.: Discussion of picture in reading
workbook--page 18.
9:48 a.m.: Teacher made "e" on the board, the "d,"
and finally "N" to elicit the name "Ned."
9:54 a.m.: Teacher went to cupboard and got a news-
paper. Discussion about where newspapers
can be bought. Chalkboard demonstration:
"press," "dress," "rest."
10:02
10:03
10:13
10:19
10:21
10:24
10:44
10:54
136
Children were introduced to next activity
verbally.
Bathroom break.
Recording: "The First Talking Alphabet."
Students had large cards and were
following verbal directions by speaker on
recording.
Teacher left room to cut paper; pupils
continued with exercise.
Teacher returned.
Large 12" x 18" manila drawing paper was
passed out to each student. Teacher
instructed them to draw pictures of
things that start with "n."
Teacher asked a child about his picture
and asked if he would like for her to
write a sentence for him about it. She
went to the board and wrote: "The north
wind blew the nest over the rainbow."
Child will copy sentence from board onto
his paper. This was referred to as a
"story."
The class then discussed the picture as
the child held it up at the front of the
room. Teacher asked child if he wanted
to write the sentence on his paper (with
a black marker) or if he wanted her to do
it. He wanted her to do it. Children
placed completed pictures on round table
at the back of the room. The teacher was
to print the sentence on the drawings for
them later. [See Appendix F: First
Grade.)
The district-provided textbooks were employed as the
foundation for the writing program in grades one through
three. They were used as a springboard for virtually all
of the writing ideas and activities noted during the
period of classroom observation.
137
On another day, Wednesday, October 14, the first
graders drew pictures of anything related to Halloween.
That afternoon, several children stood up in front of the
room and "shared" (i.e. , explained what they had drawn)
their pictures. The children had a choice as to whether
they shared their drawings with their classmates. They
were not compelled to do so.
At 1:15 p.m., the teacher said, "Tomorrow you will
write stories about your pictures." The sharing contin-
ued. The last child presented his picture at 1:18 p.m.
Pupils were told that they must write a sentence for their
pictures. The teacher admonished, "Boys and girls, don’t
go home and copy a sentence from a book. We want
something original, even if you make an error. We can
straighten it out tomorrow." The activity ended at
1:28 p.m. These proposed language-experience stories
represent what teachers of composition would call
"writing."
During the observation period, the children in the
five classrooms observed were not given an opportunity to
write a composition on their own, choosing a topic of
interest to them. Nearly all "paper and pencil"
activities noted in the classrooms were in response to
prechosen assignments. The textbooks were the primary
138
source of writing stimuli, followed closely by commercial
writing materials.
EQELQI_2
The opportunity to write for real, personally sig-
nificant purposes.
During the observation period, the researcher noted
no instance when the children had an opportunity to write
something personal and of interest to them, nor did they
engage in writing for a real purpose, as defined by Farr
and Daniels (1986). The findings confirm those of other
researchers--that most of the writing that children do in
school is related to school-based tasks such as completing
workbook pages, writing to complete textbook assignments,
taking tests, writing' dictated spelling sentences,
completing worksheets, and doing Workshop Way exercises.
Farr and Daniels referred to this as "writing to show
learning" (p. 53).
Handwriting' practice, incorrectly but commonly
referred to as "writing," was done daily in several of the
participating classrooms. The spelling book was the
starting point of the handwriting exercises, supplemented
by worksheets.
139
EQQLOI 4
Experience in writing for a wide range of audiences,
both inside and outside of school.
Students in the participating classrooms generally
wrote for the teacher as sole audience because the writing
was done to complete textbook assignments. In two
classrooms, students were encouraged to share their work
with their peers. Pupils in the first grade were given an
opportunity to stand up, display their pictures, and talk
about them. The children appeared to enjoy this
experience. On Thursday, October 29, the children in the
third/fourth-grade classroom talked about the paragraphs
they had written the previous day. The teacher had
announced a "sharing time" commencing at 10:30 a.m. The
paragraph topic concerned learning a new activity. The
assignment was a commercial worksheet with several
questions that the pupils had to answer. Upon completing
the exercise, the children should have had a complete
paragraph. A few children, one boy and-four girls, came
forward voluntarily and read their paragraphs to their
peers. The instructor asked good questions of the other
students in the room to elicit responses to the five
paragraphs that had been read. One question, "What did
you like about that student’s paragraph?" gave the
children an opportunity to offer positive feedback to the
writer/reader. These kinds of activities provide young
140
writers with an audience other than the teacher and
themselves.
An interview with the principal elicited a variety of
responses concerning activities that students in the
school had done that school year before the study and
would be doing in the months to come. The pupils had
written get-well notes for classmates who were ill. On
holidays and special occasions such as Valentine’s Day and
Mother’s Day, pupils would make cards for their parents,
grandparents, and other family members. Community
organizations sometimes sponsored writing contests in
which the pupils could participate. The'pupils in grades
one through six, including children in the special
education classes, had written scripts for a radio program
entitled "Who Am I?" The assignment asked the children to
write short literary sketches about famous Black
Americans: the answer to the riddle was given shortly
after the sketch was read. This activity was done the
previous year during February, which is commonly known as
Black History month. Other activities included writing
compositions for the Young Writers’ Conference. The
children also engaged in the city-wide Battle of the Books
writing competition, which substantiates the reading and
writing connection (Lundsteen, 1979: Tway, 1985) . Some
youngsters wrote articles to the local newspaper during
elections or to comment on a contemporary issue being
141
discussed locally or nationally. School trips were also
mentioned as subject matter for compositions.
One must remember that some of these activities are
seasonal in nature, and even though writing in such
contexts was not observed during the month of October, it
is fully conceivable that the children will engage in
these activities at appropriate times during the school
year. Even so, writing seemed to be a special event
rather than a regular occurrence in the classrooms
observed.
ac 5
Rich and continuous reading experience, including
both published literature of acknowledged merit and
the work of peers and instructors.
The school at which the study was conducted, an
attendance center serving 301 students, has a large,
beautifully maintained library, which is located on the
first floor of the two-story school building. The library
is fully carpeted and well-stocked with children’s books,
many of which are new. There are reference works of
several kinds. Maps, globes, magazines, newspapers, and
other visual aids and materials are available for use by
the faculty and the students.
The library is staffed by a library aide who works
there daily. In addition to managing the book collection,
the aide coordinates the Battle of the Books contest,
142
which is a district-wide reading competition for
elementary students. The aim of the contest is to have
students increase their reading ability and growth in
literature in a fun-filled and exciting manner.
Each classroom in the school is assigned a special
library period (see Appendix J: School Library Schedule).
The kindergarten classroom studied had a 15-minute session
in the library each week. The students in grades one,
two, and three were scheduled for a 30-minute period each
week. During this time the students, supervised by their
teacher and the library aide, choose books to check out
for one week. Also, the library aide sometimes shows a
filmstrip to the children. She did this on Tuesday,
October 13, for the afternoon kindergarten class. The
children enjoyed "The Gingerbread Boy" presentation.
Four of the five classrooms studied had books, other
than textbooks, available in the room for the children to
read. In few instances, however, did the children go to
get a book while the researcher was observing. It
appeared that they rarely had time to do any extra
reading. They were kept "on task" doing textbook
assignments. Each student had a library book in his/her
desk, though, that he/she could read whenever all
assignments were finished.
143
"Story Time" was listed on the daily class schedule
(see Appendix I: Subject Schedule). However, the
observer noted the oral sharing of literature by the
teachers in the kindergarten and first-grade rooms only.
Quite possibly, stories were read aloud to the children in
the other classrooms during nonobservation periods.
Children in the kindergarten room were exposed to an
environment rich in print. In addition to the hanging
tags designating learning centers in the room, many
classroom objects were labeled. On one long wall there
were 24 large teacher-made newsprint posters displaying
themes from the Picture/Word Association Module in the
commercial textbook purchased by the teacher.
At the book corner, furnished with a book stand, rug,
and two vinyl bean bag chairs (red and blue), the young
children were exposed to the following books: Qus ahd the
Baby Ghost, Peter and the elf, gus Wes e Friendly ghost,
gebbi ts ahg Skunks ahg Speoks, Georgie te the Beseue,
Georgie and the Noisy Ghost, Qiiffiord’s heiioween,
fieergie’s Haiioween, fies Wes e Gergeoes Ghoet, and fieergie
W-
The pupils in the kindergarten classroom also enjoyed
listening to familiar story classics, such as "The Elves
and the Shoemaker," "Rapunzel," and "The Gingerbread Man."
These stories were on a recording that the children heard
through headsets. The children could follow the text,
144
using the story books that were placed on the table along
with the other listening materials. There was room for
two children at the listening center, which was used
daily.
As noted earlier, some additional books were
available for the children in four of the participating
classrooms. These books were placed on bookshelves and,
in one room, in plastic bins. The classrooms were
generally bright and cheerful, with several eye-catching
bulletin boards displaying commercial teaching materials
designed to enhance learning. Dictionaries were available
for student use. For one example, when the researcher
entered the third/fourth-grade classroom on Thursday,
October 29, she noted the presence of 22 hot-pink
WeheterLe_1htermegiete_nietieherie§ on some shelves in the
classroom, which had not been there previously. Teacher E
explained that she had found the books downstairs and had
brought them up two days earlier for her students’ use.
The print environment was also enhanced in the third-
grade classroom. The instructor had created and labeled
several learning centers around the classroom.
Although surrounded by published literature, the
students were focused on completing their textbook
assignments. After finishing their assigned tasks, a few
145
of the pupils read their library books, which were kept in
their desks.
The children in the study did not have an opportunity
to read written works by their peers and their teachers.
Their chief exposure to reading was through the basal
reading textbooks and the books in the extensive school
library.
Eector §
Exposure to models of writing in process and writers
at work, including both teachers and classmates.
The young children in this study had the opportunity
to see their peers "writing," i.e., using a pencil to
complete assigned lessons and other activities. They saw
their teachers completing the numerous clerical tasks
associated with maintaining a classroom. However, they
did not see writers engaged in the actual process of
composing (Graves, 1983) because the writing process was
not taught in any of the five classrooms. In no instances
were the teachers observed demonstrating their own writing
of a composition to share with their classes.
ac 0
Instruction in the process of writing: that is,
learning to work at a given writing task in
appropriate phases, including pre-writing, drafting,
and revising.
The writing process (Graves, 1983) was not being
taught in the classrooms under study.
146
Limit—8.
Collaborative activities for students that provide
ideas for writing and guidance for revising works in
progress.
The writing workshop method, as explained by Graves,
would be the most effective means of providing students
with collaborative activities for composition. However,
no awareness of this method or of any of the recent
research done in writing was evident. One exception noted
was in the kindergarten room when the teacher spoke of
having the children engage in prewriting activities when
they were playing with clay dough at the Surprise Center
on Tuesday, October 13, during the afternoon observation
session. On an earlier occasion, Monday, October 4, this
teacher had spoken about invented spelling and her move
(and the district’s) from the use of workbooks toward
early childhood developmental activities. The researcher
gleaned this information at the end of that morning’s
observation period.
Eaetor 2
One-to-one writing conferences with the teacher.
As the children were working on their various
assignments, teachers monitored their progress. They
moved around the room, helping students who needed
additional assistance. There were no one-to-one writing
147
conferences with the teacher because the writing process
was not being used.
W
Direct instruction in specific strategies and
techniques for writing.
The researcher observed direct instruction in
handwriting practice in one classroom. The children were
learning cursive writing, and the teacher was modeling for
them at the chalkboard.
In another classroom, pupils received instruction
about writing sentences and paragraphs. The lessons were
introduced in the language textbook and reinforced with
commercial worksheets. Assignments were introduced in the
traditional "presentational" mode, which, according to
Hillocks (1984), is characterized by:
(1) relatively clear and specific objectives, such as
to use particular rhetorical techniques: (2) lecture
and teacher-led discussion dealing with concepts to
be learned and applied: (3) the study of models and
other materials that explain and illustrate the
concept: (4) specific assignments or exercises that
generally involve imitating a pattern or following
rules that have been previously discussed: and (5)
feedback coming primarily from teachers. The
presentational mode is undoubtedly the most common
mode of instruction in composition. (p. 133)
Because the writing process method was not used, the
teachers provided no direct instruction in specific
writing strategies, such as choosing a topic, peer
editing, sharing a first draft, and so on. Children were
148
taught according to the instructions in the teachers’
editions of the district-provided textbooks.
mu
Reduced instruction in grammatical terminology and
related drills, with increased use of sentence
combining activities.
The mechanics of grammar basically were taught as
part of the reading, spelling, and language lessons.
Besides using the textbooks, instructors used worksheets
and the chalkboard for modeling purposes. The researcher
did not observe the use of sentence combining activities.
Factor i2
Teaching of writing mechanics and grammar in the
context of students’ actual compositions, rather than
in separate drills or exercises.
The children in the participating classrooms were
instructed in the mechanics of grammar and other aspects
of writing within the context of the regular textbook
lessons. These assignments formed the foundation of the
writing program. Duplicated materials were also a major
part of the program. Original student compositions were
not used.
W
Moderate marking of surface structure errors,
focusing on sets or patterns of related errors.
As noted in Table 6, very few original compositions
were filed in the pupils’ writing folders. Corrections
149
generally were not made on the work (see Appendix F:
Samples of Children’s Writing, By Grade Level).
Feetor 15
Flexible and cumulative evaluation of student writing
that stresses revision and is sensitive to variations
in subject, audience, and purpose.
The writing workshop approach (prewriting, drafting,
sharing, revising, publishing) was not in operation in the
five participating classrooms. Therefore, the researcher
did not observe the important aspect of supervising an
original composition from start to finish. Neither did
she observe evaluation of pupils’ writing, as recommended
by Farr and Daniels (1986) and others.
Fector 15
Practicing and using writing as a tool of learning in
all subjects in the curriculum, not just in English.
Interview questions yielded positive responses about
this factor, yet writing across curriculum subjects was
not observed in any classroom. Several papers, however,
about other subjects were filed in the 'writing folders.
These included papers with number words written on them
(mathematics) and a paper listing parts of the ear
(science). There were no reports, however, showing the
critical thinking that can result from researching a topic
from social studies, for example. According to interview
responses, a science fair had been held the previous
150
school year. The children had conducted experiments and
written compositions about the results of those
experiments.
The observations took place during the month of
October, which is still early in the school year. Perhaps
more writing-integrated activities would be planned and
instituted as the school year progressed.
52mmezx
In this chapter the data were presented in four
sections. The various documents collected for the
investigation were discussed in the first section. State
artifacts were discussed first, followed by the local
school district materials. Finally, materials purchased
and made by the five participating teachers were reviewed.
Sections two and three contained questionnaire and
interview data from the three administrators, four of the
five teachers, and the ten student participants. In the
fourth section, the classroom observation data were
analyzed according to the 15 factors associated with
effective writing instruction as detailed by Farr and
Daniels (1986).
The entire research project is summarized in Chapter
V. Conclusions drawn from the study findings are set
forth, and implications of the research are discussed.
151
Finally, recommendations are made for practice and for
future research.
CHAPTER V
SUMMARY , FINDINGS , CONCLUSIONS , IMPLICATIONS ,
AN D RECOMMENDATIONS
Summa S u
This study was designed to scrutinize the writing
program in the primary grades of an inner-city school.
Writing, as a curriculum discipline, has been largely
ignored as a priority nationally. Consequently, children
have not learned to write well. This is even more true
for nonmainstream children, who populate most urban
schools. The present researcher sought not only to
describe the primary-grade writing curriculum of one
inner-city school, but also to observe what conditions
existed that enhanced or impeded the teaching and learning
of composition in that school. The four central research
questions explored in this study were:
1. What problems do inner-city children face in
learning to write?
2. What problems in teaching writing do teachers
face in an inner-city school?
3. What supports exist for teaching writing in the
primary grades in this inner-city school?
152
153
4. What constraints exist for teaching writing in
the primary grades in this inner-city school?
Chapter II contained a review .of the current
literature about writing. Section one was a discussion of
the written literacy of young children in general, and
section two contained information about linguistically
diverse children, particularLy the young black writer of
dialect in an urban school setting.
The study methodology was descriptive analysis, in
which the researcher observed a particular situation and
sought to describe the actual state of the composition
curriculum. The conceptual or theoretical framework used
as the analytical tool was a checklist of the 15 key
factors associated with effective writing instruction, as
developed by Farr and Daniels (1986).
Data were collected in two phases. First, the
researcher spent many months collecting national, state,
and local idocuments related to the teaching of
composition. These materials were examined in detail.
The second part of the investigation involved
actual classroom observation, questionnaire distribution
and analysis, and interviews with three administrators,
four teachers, and ten students. The students were
interviewed twice, first concerning their writing habits
and attitudes and second to ascertain their feelings about
reading. These three major activities, classroom
154
observations, questionnaire distribution and analysis, and
interviews, consumed approximately 100 hours.
The research data were presented and analyzed in
Chapter IV. The four data sources were (a) collected
documents, (b) questionnaires, (c) interviews, and. (d)
observations. The findings are discussed more fully in
the following section.
E' 2' s
In this section, each of the four central research
questions is restated and is then answered according to
the data obtained in this study.
Researeh Question 1
What problems do inner-city children face in learning
to write?
Assertive diecipline. Using the assertive-discipline
paradigm ascribed to by the school under study has several
positive aspects: fewer rules, fairness, uniform
procedure, known consequences, reward system, and so cum
One factor, however, hindered pupils’ writing development:
the limitation on pupil movement within the classroom.
Pupils did not have the freedom to move around the
classroom to get writing materials (folders, markers,
staples, special publishing materials). Assertive
discipline, while it may solve some classroom management
155
problems, probably would hamper children in a good writing
program.
Qieeereeh_ergehiretien. Good classroom organization
fosters effective classroom instruction. Pupils need to
know classroom guidelines, and their daily classroom
routine needs to have a certain amount of predictability.
Writing materials should be available and placed so that
the pupils have easy access to them. Room arrangement is
also important. The transition from one activity or
lesson to another should take place in an orderly manner.
In general, good classroom management was evident in three
of the classrooms, fair in one, and marginal in one.
W The BMW
does not have stated objectives for writing. For grades
one through three, the current curriculum guides list
objectives for composition (see Appendix D: Local School
District Documents). The objectives appear to be sound
and encompass the area of writing mechanics, yet they do
not wholly reflect the recent research on the process of
achieving these objectives. New language arts goals
currently being reviewed show evidence of more recent
knowledge regarding the teaching of composition.
Because the current composition objectives do not
reflect the latest in writing research, the children were
not being exposed to this new research: thus their writing
development was hindered. The writing workshop or studio
156
methodology is regarded by composition authorities to be
an effective means of helping young children become
proficient in composition, but it is not implemented in
the classrooms in this study.
'5 'ct i ' 'es. Composition for primary-grade
children was not a. high priority in this school system
until last year. Consequently, young children were not
encouraged to write on an integrated, district-wide basis,
although some had been writing under the direction of
their own classroom teachers. Now that the school
district has placed many progressive, educational enrich-
ment plans into effect, and these programs have been
recognized locally, throughout Michigan, and nationally,
attention has been drawn to the teaching of composition.
With the district providing the leadership and
establishing the priorities, the problem of children not
receiving adequate, research-based instruction in writing
will probably be alleviated soon.
c o c s s . The school studied in this
project was constructed in 1936. The classrooms, although
not overly small, reflect the building plans of that
period. They are not as large as the classrooms in newer,
more modern schools in the district. With the exception
of the large kindergarten classroom, the participating
classrooms were relatively crowded. The students did not
157
have enough space to move around. Perhaps a writing
center could be established in every classroom, but the
space would be limited, and the requisite mobility would
be somewhat restricted.
Bower Writi g. A major weakness of the system’s
newly proposed Power Writing program is that it denies
children the ownership of their own writing ideas and
creativity. Topics are selected for them, even though
researchers have found that children write more if they
are allowed to choOse their own topics. Thus, in Power
Writing, children are deprived of one important aspect of
the writing process: the growth and expanded thinking
that all writers experience when they are allowed to
reflect about. what they know, brainstorm. possible
subjects, narrow their choices, and eventually commence
drafting a piece of writing.
Another problem posed by the Power Writing program is
that it circumscribes children’s writing in terms of
length. Children are to begin writing in "bits and
pieces," words, phrases, sentences, paragraphs, and
finally an entire composition. In contrast, children
should have the time and the freedom to choose their own
topics and to write as long and as much as their
creativity allows them.
158
In summary, the Power Writing program can thwart a
child’s creativity while it seeks to provide a structured
model with which to teach writing.
WW. Correc-
tions in spelling were noted by the teacher on the few
original writing samples included in the study, e.g.,
"bekus" to "because." This could be construed as a
natural reflexive action on the teacher’s part. The
researcher did not observe the teachers giving dialectical
instruction or examining students’ errors to see if they
formed a particular pattern.
Nonacceptance of dialect did not surface as a
problem, possibly because four of the five participating
teachers in the study and the principal were of the same
racial background (black) as the students. The one white
teacher included in the study was very warm and accepting
of the minority children in her classroom.
e c e re t’ . The five teachers in this study
had little background in teaching composition. It is
hardly possible to do an effective job in any area without
adequate preparation. Thus, the children in this study
were not receiving writing instruction as recommended by
the leading researchers in the field. They were, however,
being taught in accord with the traditional manner of
teaching handwriting and spelling.
159
W- As with assertive discipline
and other issues, the use of textbooks as the foundation
of a writing program had both positive and negative
aspects. On the positive side, writing ideas and topics
were provided by the authors of the spelling, reading, and
language textbooks employed by the teachers. Besides
giving reluctant student writers a subject for their
writing, the regular assignments allowed children to have
more experience with writing than they would have had if
their teachers were uncomfortable about teaching
composition and elected not to teach it at all or very
rarely. Having the writing segments "built in" to the
regular lessons ensured that the children were at least
receiving the rudiments of writing instruction.
Using textbooks had the drawback of limiting
children’s creativity. Perhaps at the very beginning,
when children are being taught to make choices, the shy,
previously unsuccessful young writer can be given several
topics and allowed to write about one. As his/her writing
ability and confidence increase, however, the child should
be encouraged to select his/her own topics. Having to
write exclusively on subjects chosen by others dulls a
child’s interest in writing, hampering the acquisition of
skills needed to master this important discipline.
Time. From the first bell at 8:40‘a.m. to the dis-
missal bell at 3:00 p.m., the children in this study were
160
busy completing assignments dictated .by the district
curriculum. Teachers and children alike progressed
through the daily lesson plans: accommodating
interruptions: moving to other areas of the building for
music, physical education, and the library session: and
attending to all the details of a complex school
environment. The youngsters apparently had no time to sit
quietly and contemplate, yet good writing requires time
for thought and reflection. In addition, children seemed
to have no time to write creatively. The school
curriculum was very demanding in terms of time. The
subtle pressure of required tests was ever present. It
has become increasingly difficult for teachers to schedule
time to teach composition, and this lack of daily writing
practice, according to the recommended methods, was a
problem for the pupils in this school.
Research Queetieh 2
What problems in teaching writing do teachers face in
an inner-city school?
[2i srtipti ye etegehts. Every school has disruptive
students, and the school under study was no exception.
The problem was not severe, however. In fact, the
researcher noted only a few children whose behavior caused
disruptions in the classroom. In one room, inadequate
classroom management was the major factor contributing to
161
disruption. In another, there seemed to be a
preponderance of highly spirited children who had
difficulty following the teacher’s directives. Classroom
management appeared to be a factor in this situation, as
well. Perhaps the observer’s presence deterred the
teacher from raising her voice and regaining control.
Children will take advantage of such situations, and the
pupils in this classroom generally did.
The strong leadership of the principal and use of the
assertive discipline plan kept the problem under control.
Individual assistance was available from the Instructional
and Staff Development Center in the form of Management
Theory Into Practice (MTIP) training sessions.
District prioritiee. This school district, which is
nationally known for its progressiveness and its
innovative educational programs, has long been aware of
the importance of writing in the school curriculum, as
evidenced by. the composition objectives included in the
revised curriculum guides. However, reading and
mathematics have traditionally received top priority in
the system. Consequently, a cohesive writing curriculum
has been lacking. This situation is beginning to change
as administrators begin to emphasize the teaching of
composition. Until writing has gained a position of high
importance officially, the problem will remain for
162
teachers, who are now following their own curricula in
writing instruction.
ihadegeete preparetioh. Lack of adequate preparation
to teach composition is a major problem facing teachers in
this inner-city school. They were effectively teaching
writing in the traditional fashion, but they lacked
training in the new methodologies suggested by Graves
(1978) and others. The problem for these teachers remains
one of lack of preservice training at the undergraduate
level and a lack of inservice training since entering the
classroom.
Leek of ciassroom spe e. Inadequate classroom space
posed a problem for teachers as well as for students. In
grades one through the third/fourth combination room,
every inch of space was used. The teachers employed extra
pieces of furniture to provide storage space and to
establish areas for instruction, such as the reading-group
area.
ngiis’ attehtieh epen. Pupils’ short attention span
is a universal problem for teachers everywhere: this
school was no exception. Attracting pupils’ attention and
keeping them "on task"--focused on their class work--was a
challenge for the educators who participated in this
study. When children have some control of their own
learning and creativity, however, as encouraged in good
writing instruction, they have more "staying power."
163
StndenteLettitngee. No matter how interesting or
stimulating the instructor makes a lesson, some children
will not be interested in school work. This problem, too,
challenged the teachers who participated in this research
project. Success in writing, however, can contribute to
improved attitudes about school.
Research Question 3
What supports exist for teaching writing in the
primary grades in this inner-city school?
e uate ' 5 ° 8. The classroom
teachers in this elementary school had ample materials at
their disposal to aid in instruction. Supplies and
equipment for duplicating educational materials were
readily available. Textbooks were provided for each
pupil. Pencils, paper, and other classroom needs were in
good supply. Besides a well-stocked library, a large
variety of teaching materials, supplies, duplicating
facilities, and other media were available to the
instructors to aid in the teaching of composition.
sser ' sc' . Because some inner-city
youngsters come from homes where firm and fair discipline
is lacking, this school must assume the responsibility for
teaching the children basic rules of behavior. Creating
and maintaining an atmosphere conducive to teaching and
learning were paramount objectives in this school.
164
The assertive discipline program provided the
students, teachers, and principal with a systematic
structure for improving classroom behavior. Firm rules
were posted in the classrooms in full view of the pupils.
These rules were periodically reviewed with the children,
as the researcher observed in two classrooms. A list of
the consequences the child could expect if he/she broke
the rules was also posted. In addition, a list of
building rules and consequences was placed periodically in
the halls throughout the building.
The major advantage of this disciplinary system was
that everyone knew the rules and the consequences of
failure to adhere to those regulations.
e 've o s. The primary teachers in this
school, as well as all the other educators in this
progressive school system, had the added support of the
district’s belief in the basic premise of "effective
schools" (All children can learn, and schools do make a
difference) and the principal’s strong adherence to this
philosophy (see Appendix D: Local School District
Documents--[City Name] Policy Statement and [City Name]
Critical Variables).
The school building was superbly maintained. The
halls were quiet, orderly, and clean. Within minutes
after the pupil-admittance bell rang, the children were in
165
their classrooms, and the corridors were relatively
noiseless. The lunchroom, gym, and bathrooms were clean.
The school plant is located on a large lot with
plenty of space for the children to play. The playground
has seven large pieces of equipment, brightly painted in
the primary colors. The well-kept grounds provide the
school personnel with a pleasant, parklike atmosphere.
When one enters the building, one immediately notices
the businesslike atmosphere of the surroundings. The
school exists for a purpose: that purpose is learning.
One senses it immediately upon entering the school plant
and passing through the corridors.
In addition, the school grounds adjoin a city-owned
park. This large area has concrete play modules, several
pieces of playground equipment, and several park benches.
There are a number of large trees, and the extensive lawns
are well maintained. Having this parklike space adjacent
to the manicured school grounds considerably enhances the
school property.
The Effective Schools program and all of the
district’s enrichment programs provide a support system
for the primary-grade teachers of this school because the
various programs encompass all of the grades (K-12) and
all of the special programs, such as gifted education and
special education, throughout the entire school district.
By necessity and by definition, the teachers in this
166
school also benefit from the adoption and administration
of these programs.
s u ' d . One of the greatest
supports that the teachers (primary, intermediate, and
secondary) of any school can have is that of a strong
instructional leader. This is true of any school,
particularly an inner-city school serving nonmainstream
children. The elementary school studied had such a
leader, one whose strong, firm, and effective leadership
could be observed throughout the school building.
A major positive feature was this principal’s strong
interest in expository writing and his expressed
commitment to improving his students’ development in
both oral and written literacy. In addition to being the
driving force behind the remodeling, furnishing, and
equipping of the school’s beautiful library, he regularly
reviewed the students’ writing assignments. He found the
time to do this despite all of the other duties he had to
perform. During an interview with the researcher on
Wednesday, October 21, the principal showed her a
collection of papers he had received from one of the
upper-grade classes. He had been reviewing the children’s
papers that morning and was enthusiastic about their
writing progress.
167
The principal seldom went out to lunch, preferring
instead to spend time in his building. On rainy or
otherwise inclement days, the students were required to
bring a book with them when they reported to the lunch
room. This announcement was made during the 11:26 a.m.
public-address-system announcement period on Friday,
October 23. The researcher was observing in the second-
grade classroom. The primary-grade children were going to
talk about their books, sharing them with the entire group
of pupils in the gymnasium. The principal took the podium
down from the stage and placed it on the gym floor, and
the children proceeded to use the microphone to make oral
book reports to their peers. The fourth, fifth, and sixth
graders reported on current events, using newspaper
clippings they had brought with them. This type of
activity strongly endorses the "writing is reading/reading
is writing" concept of literacy and can effectively
reinforce the teachers’ commitment to literacy in their
classrooms.
The principal’s belief in and adherence to the
district’s Effective Schools program also acted as a
support for the teachers in this school. For example,
public-address announcements were kept to a minimum.
Morning announcements were made between 8:45 a.m. and
9:00 a.m., after the 8:40 a.m. pupil-entrance bell. No
further announcements were made until 11:25 a.m. , when
168
necessary communications were relayed to the students and
the staff. During the month-long classroom observation
period, the researcher noted only two instances when the
instructional time was interrupted by the public-address
system. Each time, the information relayed was essential
to the operation of the school. Other interruptions were
kept to an absolute minimum.
To illustrate: One student came quietly to the rooms
to pick up the lunch count and attendance details about
9:00 a.m. Then the student returned with the lunch
tickets just before lunch. This procedure was performed
quietly and unobtrusively. Likewise, when support
personnel came to pick up children for additional instruc-
tion, they did so quietly. With these minimum
interruptions to the classroom routine, the teachers and
students could spend more time "on task."
The high visibility of the building’s instructional
leader provided important support for the teachers.
Children, also, need to see their principal in various
locations around the building, and faculty members need to
know that their administrator is available for guidance
and assistance should the need arise.
Litrm. A newly remodeled, fully stocked school
library provided the instructors with an excellent
foundation to increase their students’ oral and written
169
literacy. The library had hundreds of books, many of them
new. The volumes were filed according to the Dewey
Decimal System and were arranged neatly on shelves in the
large, attractive, carpeted room.
Although a certified elementary librarian is
desirable, the library was staffed by a full-time aide,
who managed the library activities. All of the classes in
the school were scheduled for one library period a week
(see Appendix J: School Library Schedule). The scheduled
sessions were 30 minutes for all- grades except
kindergarten, whose library period was 15 minutes a week.
The aide maintained the card catalogue and ordered
and filed additional equipment and materials for the
library. She sometimes showed filmstrips to the children.
On Tuesday, October 13, the youngsters in the afternoon
kindergarten class saw the filmstrip, "The Gingerbread
Boy." During the lS-minute session (2:30 p.m.-2:45 p.m.),
children had no opportunity to select books to check out
because showing the filmstrip occupied much of the time.
In addition to the scores of volumes on the shelves,
the library had globes, maps, atlases, dictionaries,
thesauri, encyclopedias, and many other resources. The
library had a special magazine section and a newspaper
section that compared favorably with that of the city’s
main library downtown. Additional resources were
170
available in a separate reference room adjacent to the
library.
W. At the time of the study, the
school had an enrollment of 301 students. This relatively
small enrollment allowed teachers to have fewer pupils in
their charge than is usually the case in inner-city
schools. Researchers have shown that a correlation exists
between instruction and class size. It has been
recommended that teachers of composition have no more than
20 students per class (NCTE, 1975).
Self—conteineg classrooms. These teachers had the
same students in their charge all day, allowing them
flexibility in their teaching schedules. Instruction was
scheduled according to the children’s needs and desires:
the teachers had only to consider the periods needed for
specialized instruction by different teachers in art,
music, physical education, and the library.
u o - ta . One of the major supports that
primary-grade teachers in this elementary school had for
the teaching of composition was the availability of
support personnel. These additional individuals included
the art, music, and physical education instructors.
During the time the children were scheduled with these
certified teachers, the regular classroom teacher was
released from the immediate supervision of her charges.
She could use that time to read children’s writing, review
171
writing folders, set up the overhead projector for teacher
modeling, publish children’s writing, record and document
children’s writing development for parents and
administrators, and perform the myriad other duties
associated with managing a classroom writing workshop or
studio, if the writing process approach was being used.
However, it was not during the time of this study.
In a sense, the library aide can be considered part
of the teachers’ support staff as she does aid in the
pupils’ development of literacy. However, the classroom
teachers in this school are not released from pupil
supervision during library time because the aide, although
extremely competent, is noncertified.
Although it is not located in the building studied,
the district’s new Instructional and Staff Development
Center and its staff can be considered part of the support
staff for the primary-grade teachers in this study. Among
other subject-area coordinators, there is a language arts
coordinator whose major duty is to coordinate the school
system’s K-12 language arts program.
Iextheeke. The primary children in the five partici-
pating classrooms had ample educational materials for use
during their school day. The kindergartners did not use
textbooks, as such. First graders used many soft-cover,
consumable textbooks for their studies. Pupils in grades
172
two and three had hard-cover textbooks, except for the
reading workbooks.
Basically, textbooks provided the foundation of this
school’s literacy program, and each pupil had a textbook
for each subject, if applicable. The textbooks gave a.
sense of security to the teachers, one of whom wanted a
composition text that would provide orderly, sequential
writing lessons. The textbooks also gave teachers and
children a structure for writing through the daily
lessons. As mentioned before, the spelling textbooks had
a weekly "Let’s Write" section that provided a writing
experience for part of each Thursday’s spelling
assignment. Although they consumed almost all of the
instructional time, the textbooks played an important role
in the teachers’ support system.
ese s 'o 4
What constraints exist for teaching writing in the
primary grades in this inner-city school?
ca 111 c ev m o . The Academic
Achievement Program was designed for educationally
disadvantaged children in grades two through six who
needed additional instruction in reading. and mathematics.
The program entailed taking these youngsters out of their
classrooms on a regular basis during the school year (see
Appendix D: Local School District Documents--The Academic
Achievement Program).
173
Kindergartners and first graders were not affected by
this program. Therefore, during this study, only those
children in grades two and three were involved in the
program. This involved three of the five classrooms
studied: second grade, third grade, and the third/fourth-
grade combination room.
Although perhaps beneficial to the young children
involved, the program caused frequent interruptions in the
regular classroom routine for the children and for the
teachers. Writing instruction, like all other
instruction, had to be halted, restarted, and even
retaught to meet one of the basic tenets of the program--
that these children were to continue to receive the same
amount of classroom instruction as children not enrolled
in the program. The teachers somehow had to meet this
instructional and/or district directive. In summary,
although realizing some beneficial aspects of this and
other compensatory-education programs, most educators were
aware of the constraints entailed in meeting the
objectives of the programs.
heeertiye_gieeipline. Teaching, as well as learning,
cannot take place in a chaotic environment. This school
and individual classrooms within the school were managed
in a calm, firm, safe, and secure manner. The atmosphere
174
was conducive to the school’s business-~the business of
learning.
The assertive discipline program provided a structure
for discipline, which can be sorely lacking in some
students from inner-city homes. This lack of discipline
is deleterious to an effective school environment and
cannot be allowed to continue. In the school under study,
this problem was alleviated, if not eliminated, through
the regular, systematic application of the tenets of
assertive discipline.
However, the disciplinary program can be too
structured and thus prove to be a hindrance to some
aspects of the educational process. For instance, the
first rule is invariably "Stay in your seat." This dictum
is fine if there has been a class discussion about when
students are permitted out of their seats. During writing
time, children need the freedom to move around the
classroom (to get writing materials, place pieces in their
writing folders, consult with their peers and the teacher,
engage in. peer editing, share their writing with
classmates, and so on). Lack of freedom to engage in
these activities, as well as other prewriting and
postdrafting* endeavors, can.‘adversely affect young
children’s writing.
Although the assertive discipline program was helpful
in establishing a firm and fair disciplinary procedure and
175
structure, it can have a negative effect on the teaching
of composition as regarded by writing specialists.
e i t . The first-grade teacher
specifically spoke of her need for clerical help on
Wednesday, October 14. During this afternoon observation,
the 21 children present drew pictures depicting a
Halloween theme. They worked on this activity from 12:37
p.m. to 1:28 p.m. While they were engaged in various
stages of this activity, the teacher said, "Tomorrow you
will write stories for your pictures. I’m in need of
parent help." She went on to say that she needed their
parents’ assistance to write their stories on the
pictures. The kindergarten teacher had a parent aide who
came in during the week.
st ' -w u ' . Although
composition objectives have been a part of the district’s
curriculum guides for many years, the subject of writing
has not been emphasized. The disciplines of reading and
mathematics have received the most attention throughout
the system, and they are the subjects measured in the
district evaluation program. This is not to say that
other subjects have been ignored. They just have not
received the same priority as reading and mathematics.
Therefore, because the district emphasizes reading and
mathematics instruction, the teachers also tend to stress
176
these two content areas. In addition, teachers need help
in seeing the value of writing for learning in all subject
areas, including reading.
W. Power Writing, which some educators
have perceived as a teacher support because it is a
unified, systematic approach to the teaching of writing,
can also be viewed as a constraint in the teaching of
composition. The very features that make Power Writing
attractive to some educators (uniformity, structure,
brevity in the early stages) impose a restraint on the
creative teacher of composition, who must accordingly
limit his/her pupils’ writing creativity and output.
Young children, not just minority student writers, need
the freedom to select their own topics and to expand or
contract their writings as necessary. Power Writing
requires that children write according to established
criteria imposed on them by outside forces. The
evaluation process is also strictly outlined. Adherence to
the program guidelines is a constraint to teachers of
composition and consequently to their students.
0 ss a . Although this urban attendance
center had a well-stocked library and a reference center
containing many resource aids, no professional library was
provided for the faculty. Naturally, the teachers had
access to all the facilities and materials available in
the school plant itself and in the school library.
177
However, a professional library can be a great source of
assistance to teachers. Such a library, furnished with
books on composition (as well as other subjects),
scholarly journals, samples of writing by children and
faculty"members, popular' teacher-instruction. magazines,
catalogues and brochures listing sources of writing
materials and publishers of children’ s work, and, most
important, professional textbooks and hand-outs containing
the latest research information on writing and the
teaching of writing would be an invaluable teacher
support. The lack of this educational resource was a
constraint on the teaching of composition in this school.
MW. Because of the wide
range of student reading abilities, the second- and third-
grade teachers believe they need to maintain several
reading groups per classroom. The kindergarten teacher
did not teach formal reading. The first graders were
placed in one reading group, as the researcher observed.
Reading instruction occupied most of the teachers’
and pupils’ time each morning because every student had to
be instructed according to his/her ability grouping. The
researcher noted four reading groups in the second-grade
classroom, three in the third-grade room, and four in the
third/fourth-grade room. During this instructional time,
it was essential for the classroom to be quiet and for the
178
children to stay "on task" as the teacher instructed each
group in turn. The teachers spent considerable time
preparing reading lessons and materials, instructing the
several groups, and managing the other students in the
classroom. The emphasis on reading instruction limited
instructional time and teacher preparation time for other
subjects, including writing. In addition, there seemed to
be little understanding of the power of writing for
teaching reading.
o oo o ' . It was the responsibility of the
regular classroom teachers to teach all of the subjects of
the ‘typical school day: reading, spelling, language,
handwriting/penmanship, mathematics, social studies,
science, health, and items on the school’s (society’s)
"hidden agenda" (manners, citizenship, values, and so on).
The teachers in this school district received some help
from support personnel for art, music, and physical
education classes. When she was available, the library
aide might also provide help. For example, if the teacher
could not manage a daily story hour, perhaps the library
aide would conduct one during the weekly library visit.
The full school curriculum and the necessity to adhere to
this curriculum in scope, sequence, and content, however,
restricted the teaching of composition in this school, as
it does in many others.
179
S n ar '2 t sts. Local, state, and national
school authorities’ emphasis on pupils’ performance on
standardized tests exerted a strong influence on the
teaching of all subjects. Fourth graders are tested in
the early fall using the Michigan Education Assessment
Program (MEAP) as the test instrument. In the spring, the
school district’s students are again tested using the
California Achievement Test (CAT).
Although there is pressure (subtle and unsubtle,
covert and overt) on educators at all. levels in this
school district to raise pupil performance levels,
teachers are particularly cognizant of the demands
associated with standardized testing. Instruction is
geared mainly to the areas tested. Because reading and
mathematics are stressed on tests, these subjects tend to
receive the most attention during the school day.
Time. The lack of time to teach composition is a
major constraint. Closely tied in with this factor are
the issues of an over-extended school curriculum, district
priorities, and emphasis on standardized test scores. The
old adage "There are only so many hours in one day"
applies here. With numerous objectives to meet and so
many subjects to teach, these teachers will have great
difficulty scheduling the large blocks of class time
needed to teach composition. Adjustments in expectations
180
in the total content of the school day will have to be
considered.
W
In the classrooms examined in this study, writing as
a process of composing an original thought was not
emphasized. Instead, the children in grades two and three
wrote compositions based on story starters, lead
sentences, and preselected topics. During the observation
period, the first graders dictated their own original
sentences describing their pictures only once. Another
time, the teacher provided the sentence for the children’s
pictures. She wrote this sentence on the board for all of
the pupils to copy. For the kindergartners, writing
instruction consisted primarily of introducing letter
concepts and practicing the printing of alphabet letters.
The teachers and pupils perceived the practice of
handwriting, both manuscript and cursive, as writing. The
pupils practiced the letters of the alphabet almost daily.
These papers were collected, and some were included in the
children’s writing folders (see Appendix F: Samples of
Children’s Writing, By Grade Level).
Any paper on which the child wrote words was
perceived as writing. This was in accordance with the
teachers’ perception of the researcher’s directions: that
teachers file all papers that they deemed to be "writing."
181
Lessons from spelling, language, reading, and Workshop Way
assignments were filed in the children’s writing folders.
These papers formed almost all of the papers in the
folders.
The use of textbooks and worksheets dominated the
writing curriculum in grades one through three. Daily use
of the published textbooks provided a methodical
progression of daily writing activities. These activities
required the children to complete exercises and, on some
days, to write a sentence, paragraph, or story on a
prescribed topic. Worksheets from ditto masters also
supplied lessons on grammar and paragraph construction.
Teachers evidenced a general lack of knowledge about
the latest research in teaching composition. The data
revealed that recent literature about the teaching of
composition had not been disseminated. Instructors were
unaware of the luminaries of the writing field and of
their research.
Conclusions
1. The main problem that the children in this ele-
mentary school faced in learning to write was that they
had not been exposed to the latest research methodology in
composition. They spent considerable time on writing-
related activities to complete their assignments, but
these required little extended thought or composition
182
ability. To summarize, the children learned writing
skills in short, discrete lessons based on language,
spelling, and reading textbooks and commercial worksheets.
Students rarely wrote compositions on topics of their own
choosing. The problem, then, proved to be not an "inner-
city" writing problem but the lack of a well-defined
writing program based on the latest research and
methodologies for writing instruction.
2. Many of the health and attention problems that
may restrict the teaching of composition and all other
subjects in inner-city schools seem to have been
alleviated in this school through the use of state and
federal funds for free and reduced-cost breakfast and
lunch programs. In addition, district 'monies have been
directed into compensatory education programs for
disadvantaged children and other innovative programs
designed to improve instruction and discipline.
3. Lack of knowledge about composition appeared to
be the main problem affecting the teachers in this study,
as it was for the children. Teachers were doing an
effective job of teaching writing as they perceived it,
but they lacked knowledge about research in dialect,
linguistically diverse children, and current methodology
on the teaching of composition. They were warm,
dedicated, and accepting of the students in their charge.
The researcher concluded that having the aforementioned
183
qualities and, given knowledge and leadership in adapting
the latest. research. in 'teaching"writing, the teachers
involved in this study would, for the most part, adopt and
practice the 15 characteristics of an effective writing
curriculum.
4. Nine supports for teaching writing were found
during the data-gathering stage of the research project:
adequate instructional materials, assertive discipline,
Effective Schools, instructional leadership, library,
pupil enrollment, self-contained classrooms, support
staff, and textbooks. The researcher concluded that the
principal, in his role as instructional leader, provided
the major support for the teaching of composition in this
inner-city school. His interest in writing and overall
leadership will provide the impetus needed for improving
his students’ writing.
The school district played a major role in the
teachers’ support system through its adoption of such
educational tenets as assertive discipline, Effective
Schools research, and other programs. These programs and
more have been implemented and directed by the school
principal, but they also need to be examined and
restructured to eliminate the negative influence they have
on instruction.
184
5. The primary-grade teachers in this study faced
ten constraints: the academic achievement program,
assertive discipline, clerical assistance, district-wide
curriculum emphasis, Power Writing, professional library,
reading instruction groups, school curricula, standardized
tests, and time. The major constraint was the district’s,
and therefore the school’s, prescribed curriculum and the
time it took to teach it. The classroom agendas were
full. Teachers had many objectives and other criteria to
meet each day. Teaching composition, as defined by Graves
(1983), Murray (1985), and others, takes large blocks of
classroom time. If, in the future, the teachers who
participated in this study decide to teach composition
according to the 15 factors defined by 'Farr and Daniels
(1986), they will have the considerable task of
instituting the writing process workshop and adhering to
the district curriculum within a circumscribed time frame.
lmelieatipme
l. The factors that constitute effective writing
instruction for nonmainstream students are the same as
those for pupils of the majority population. In fact,
Farr and Daniels (1986) stated that these factors may be
applied to suburban students. Therefore, the findings may
be used in other schools in the district, not just in
those with a high percentage of minority students.
185
2. Writing process methods of teaching composition
can be much less expensive than the traditional methods
because the children’s writings become their "textbooks."
School funds allocated for textbooks for the teaching of
composition can be used for other materials needed for
instruction, i.e., reference books, publishing materials,
and so on. Moffett (1983) stated, "My main purpose has
been to propose that writing be taught ,naturalistically,
by writing, and that the only texts be the student
productions themselves" (p. 210). He called for a break
in the "self-perpetuating cycle that revolves among
education schools, classrooms, school administrations, and
publishers. The teaching of writing will not improve until
the cycle is broken" (p. 210).
3. The difficulty the researcher had in locating a
primary school in.‘which. to study' the teaching of
composition implies that writing was not emphasized in the
district’s curriculum priorities. This implication was
verified by the research data. triangulation
(questionnaires, interviews, and classroom observations).
4. Although this study was conducted in an inner-
city school, the researcher believes that the
socioeconomic status of the pupils had no apparent bearing
on their ability to learn to write under favorable
conditions in school. Because the writing program in this
school did not comply with the latest research about what
186
constitutes effective writing instruction, the children
did not experience the benefits that writing could give
them: to validate their life experiences and to help them
become more literate in written English.
Recommendations
In this section, the writer offers recommendations to
be used as guidelines for improving the composition
curriculum at both the district and the building levels.
1. Teachers should be taught how to use the writing
process workshop method of teaching composition in their
classrooms (Graves, 1983).
2. Each teacher should be supplied with a copy of
the Essentiei Qeels ene Ohjeetives fer Writing. K-lz
(1985), published by the Michigan Department of Education.
3. A professional library for the faculty should be
established within the school building.
4. The school or district should subscribe to such
scholarly journals as Wane. hombres.
Wan ' . WW. Teoonor.
and W.
5. Membership in such professional organizations as
the National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) , the
Michigan Council of Teachers of English (MCTE) , and the
Michigan Writers Project (MWP) should be encouraged.
Teachers’ and principals’ attendance at meetings and
187
conventions held by these organizations should also be
encouraged and supported by the school district.
6. Findings from the latest research on the teaching
of composition--hand-outs, fliers, newsletters, and
reprints from articles on writing--should be disseminated.
7. Inservice sessions and seminars on the latest
writing research should be scheduled and conducted by
university professors, successful classroom writing
teachers, and other experts in the field of writing.
8. Teachers should be encouraged to enroll in writ-
ing courses offered by colleges, universities, and/or the
Instructional and Staff Development Center. If feasible,
teachers should be remunerated for taking such courses.
9. Administrative leadership in writing should con-
tinue, and composition at the elementary level should be
given a higher priority in the school district’s
curriculum. '
10. Acquisition of knowledge about oral and written
literacy of early childhood should be stressed through
workshops at the Instructional and Staff Development
Center.
11. The assistance of university personnel or other
knowledgeable experts as resource people should be
enlisted before adopting any commercial writing programs
or curricular materials related to writing. Currently
188
approved programs in writing should be re-evaluated after
a careful examination of the current literature on compo-
sition.
12. Teachers and administrators, themselves, should
be encouraged to write and to share their writings with
children and adults.
u es d eas o
This study represents a small part of the existing
literature about the teaching of composition. As Graves
(1978), Clark et al. (1982), and others have noted, more
research must be done in this critical area. The writer
offers the following suggestions for further research:
1. An examination of primary classrooms in an inner-
city school where a successful writing program has been
operating.
2. An examination of a later elementary writing pro-
gram, grades four through six, in an inner-city school.
3. A study examining the written literacy of minor-
ity preschoolers and junior first graders.
4. Comparison of the writing program of a rural and/
or suburban elementary school with that of an inner-city
elementary school.
5. A study of the dialectical differences in the
compositions of linguistically diverse children.
APPEN DI CES
APPENDIX A
CORRESPONDENCE
189
MICHIGAN STATE UNIVERSITY
Inmmmnvcousnnsomnneumuummwwmc tmn'uuummiowxxmmN-uaneus
ammuvsmmunsnxmns: '
unanwmmnmuxniunuch
(517) SSS-2|“ May 7’ 1987
Ms. Shirley Mae Jackson-Holmes
3515 Wadsworth Road. R.D. 3
Saginaw, Michigan 48601
Dear Ms. Jackson-Holmes:
Subject: Proposal Entitled, "An Investigation of the Conditions
Affecting the Teaching of Composition in an Inner-City
Elementary School. Grades Kindergarten Through Three:
A Descriptive Studv"
UCRIHS' review of the above referenced project has now been completed. I
am pleased to advise that since the reviewer's comments have been
satisfactorily addressed. the conditional approval given by the Committee
at its May 4, 1987 meeting has now been changed to full approval. A
suggestion was made however, that you reword the typed consent form in
language that can be understood easily by this population. The use of
words such as "prerogative" and "adverse consequences" may be beyond their
comprehension. This is merely a suggestion. not a condition of approval.
You are reminded that UCRIHS approval is valid for one calendar year. If
you plan to continue this project beyond one year, please make provisions
for obtaining appropriate UCRIHS approval prior to May 4, 1988.
Any changes in procedures involving human subjects must be reviewed by the
UCRIHS prior to initiation of the change. UCRIHS must also be notified
promptly of any problems (unexpected side effects. complaints. etc.)
involving human subjects during the course of the work.
Thank you for bringing this project to our attention. If we can be of any
future help, please do not hesitate to let us know.
Sincerely,
L.
Henry E. Bredeck, Ph.D.
Chairman, UCRIHS
HEB/jms
cc: Dr. Sheila Fitzgerald
”5U it a Allil'utnv Arno-aw Wy m
190
FRANK SCHAFFER PUBLICATIONS, INC.
10771 “CELLAR DRIVE
TORMNCE. CALIFORNIA man:
(213) m
December 2, 1987
Ms. Shirley M. Holmes
3515 Wadsworth Road
Saginaw, Mi 48601
Dear Ms. Holmes:
This is in response to your letter of November 18, 1987,
requesting permission to use copies of our worksheets that
have been completed by students in your dissertation.
You have our permission to use completed worksheets from
Frank Schaffer materials as long as our copyright appears
on each sheet.
EXAMPLE
Q Frank Schaffer Publications 19 FS-7136 Initial Consonants
Thank you for writing to us and for your interest in our
educational materials. Good luck with your dissertation.
Sincerely,
Frank Schaffer
President
FS/bc
APPENDIX B
QUESTIONNAIRES, INTERVIEW FORMATS, PARENTAL CONSENT
FORMS, AND TEACHER VOLUNTEER-PARTICIPANT LETTER
191
Questionnaire:
Assistant Snperintendent for Elementary Education
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
What do you perceive to be the current status of
the writing component of the language arts
curriculum for the primary grades in the district?
What do you perceive as strengths of the current
writing program at the primary grade level?
What do you perceive as weaknesses, if any, in the
current writing program at the primary grade
level?
What changes and/or improvements in the writing
program would you like to see implemented?
1 year
3 years
5 years
Are there any provisions in the language arts
program for dialectically different students,
particularly in the area of writing?
Additional comments:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
192
Questionnaire:
Languege Arts Coordinator
What do you perceive to be the mm' of
the writing component of the language arts
curriculum at the K-3 level?
What do you perceive as strengths of the current
writing program at the primary grade level?
What do you perceive as weaknesses, if any. in the
current writing program at the primary grade
level?
What changes and/or improvements in the writing
program would you like to sea implemented?
1 year
3 years
5 years
Are there any provisions in the language arts
program for dialectically different students:
particularly in the area of writing?
‘9
Additional comments:
193
Questionnaire:
Principal
(1) What do you perceive to be the current statu_s‘ of
the writing component of the language arts
curriculum in your building?
(2) What do you perceive as strengths of the primary
grade writing program in your building?
(3) What do you perceive as weaknesses: if any, of the
primary grade writing program in your building?
(4) What changes and/or improvements in the writing
program would you like to see implemented in your
building?
1 year
3 years
5 years
(5) Additiodal comments:
194
Questionnaire:
Teachers
Part I - Background and Training
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
How many years have you taught?
How many years have you taught in inner-city
schools?
How many years have you taught in this school?
How much preparation on the teaching of writing
have you had?
rUndergraduate courses?
Graduate courses?
Inservice or conference sessions?
Highest level of degree status earned?
Can you speak a dialect of English other than
Standard English?
Do you ever use this dialect with the children in
school?
When? ;
Why?
Have you had any training in dialect differences
and their impact on the learning of young
children?
Part
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
195
II - Writing Program and Materials
Describe your writing program at this level.
What commercial curriculum materials are you
currently using in the teaching of your writing
program?
What is your opinion of the usefulness of these
curriculum materials?
What teacher-made curriculum materials are you
currently using in the teaching of your writing
program?
What is your opinion of the usefulness of these
curriculum materials?
What changes or improvements would you like to see
in the writing program in this school in:
1 year?
3 years?
5 years?
Additional comments:
196
Interview Formet:
Assistant Suoerintendent for Elementary Education
Part I--Introductory Questions.
(I) Is there any answer from the questionnaire that you would
like to expand?
(2) Is there anything concerning the writing program that you
would like to add or discuss that was not covered or
mentioned on the questionnaire?
Part II--Questions Concerning Knowledge of Current Research/Practices
in Writing Instruction (adopted from Farr & Daniels, Lan-
guage Diversity end Writing Instruction, 1986).
(I) Do you understand and appreciate the basic linguistic compe-
tence that young children bring with them to school, and
have positive expectations for young children’s achievements
in writing?
(2) Are the primary grade children in the district provided with
sufficient time to practice their writing?
(3) Do the primary grade children in the district have the
opportunity to write for a variety of audiences?
(4) Are workbooks and ditto sheets used in the district to teach
writing mechanics and granmar or are the children’s own
compositions employed for this purpose?
(5) Has writing been made an integral part of the entire curric-
ulum, not just in the language arts?
197
Interview format:
Language Arts Cgordinator
Part I--Introductory Questions.
(l) Is there any answer from the questionnaire that you would
like to expand?
(2) Is there anything concerning the writing program that you
would like to add or discuss that was not covered or
mentioned on the questionnaire?
Part II—-Questions Concerning Knowledge of Current Research/Practices
in Writing Instruction (adopted from Farr & Daniels, Lan-
guage Diversity and Writing Instrggtign, l986).
(l) Do you understand and appreciate the basic linguistic compe-
tence that young children bring with them to school, and
have positive expectations for young children’s achievements
in writing?
(2) Are the primary grade children in the district provided with
sufficient time to practice their writing?
(3) Do the primary grade children in the district have the
opportunity to write for a variety of audiences?
(4) Are workbooks and ditto sheets used in the district to teach
writing mechanics and granlnar or are the children’s own
compositions employed for this purpose?
(5) Has writing been made an integral part of the entire curric-
ulum, not just in the language arts?
198
Interview,Format:
Principal
Part I--Introductory Questions.
(l) Is there any answer from the questionnaire that you would
like to expand?
(2) Is there anything concerning the writing program that you
would like to add or discuss that was not covered or
mentioned on the questionnaire?
Part II--Questions Concerning Knowledge of Current Research/Practices
in Writing Instruction (adopted from Farr & Daniels, Lan-
guage Diversity and Writing Instruction, 1986).
(l) Do you understand and appreciate the basic linguistic compe-
tence that young children bring with them to school, and
have positive expectations for young children’s achievements
in writing?
(2) Are the primary grade children in your building provided
with sufficient time to practice their writing?
(3) Do the primary grade children in your building have the
opportunity to write for a variety of audiences?
(4) Are workbooks and ditto sheets used in your building to
teach writing mechanics and grammar or are the children’s
own compositions employed for this purpose?
(5) Has writing been made an integral part of the entire curric-
ulum, not just in the language arts?
199
Interview Format:
leather
Part I--Introductory Questions.
(1) Is there any answer from the questionnaire that you would
like to expand?
(2) Is there anything concerning the writing program that you
would like to add or discuss that was not covered or
mentioned on the questionnaire?
(3) How did you learn to write?
(4) Describe how you would teach a class of children to write if
you didn’t have any restraints--an ideal situation.
Part II--Questions Concerning Knowledge of Current Research/Practices
in Writing Instruction (adopted from Farr & Daniels, Lan-
guage Diversitytgnd Writing Instruction, l986).
(1) Do you understand and appreciate the basic linguistic
competence that young children bring with them to school, and
have positive expectations for young children’s achievements
in writing?
(2) Are the students in your classroom provided with sufficient
time to practice their writing?
(3) Do the children have the opportunity to write for real pur-
poses that are significant to them?
(4) Do the children have the opportunity to write for a variety
of audiences?
(5) Are your students surrounded by a rich print environment,
including works published by acknowledged authors and the
work of their classmates and teachers?
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
200
Do the children have opportunities to view pieces of writing
in progress and to see how writers actually compose?
Do you teach or have you taught the writing process to your
pupils?
Are the students allowed to work in small peer groups for
revision purposes and the sharing of ideas?
Do ,you conduct one-to-one writing conferences with your
students?
Do you teach your students specific strategies and tech-
niques for writing?
Are the children in your classroom provided with more
instruction in the use of sentence-combining skills and less
emphasis on grammar?
Do you use workbooks and ditto sheets to teach writing
mechanics and grammar, or do you use the children’s own
compositions?
Do you tend to mark every single error on a pupil’s composi-
tion, or do you tend to look for similar groups, sets, or
patterns of errors?
Do you stress revision when you evaluate the children’s com-
positions, showing sensitivity' to variations in subject,
audience, and purpose?
Has writing been made an integral part of your entire.
curriculum, not just in the language arts?
(l)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
201
Questionnaire/Interview:
Selected Student Informants
Do you like to write?
What kinds of writing do you like to do?
What ideas are the most interesting to write
about?
Describe what you think a good griter is:
Are you a good writer?
Why or why not?
How often do you write at school?
How often do you write at home?
What do you like best about writing?
What could the teacher do to help you become a
better writer?
202
Interview/Questionnaire
Reading Habits of Selected Student Informants
(9) Do You like to read?
(10) What kinds of books do you like to read?
(11) Do you read at home? 'when?
(12) Do you read at school? When?
203
PARENTAL CONSENT LETTER
3515 Wadsworth Road
Saginaw. MI 48601
April 30. 1987
Dear Parent:
As a graduate student at Michigan State
University. I inn conducting a research project on the
conditions affeqting the teaching of composition in an
inner-city school. I will be observing writing
instruction in your child's classroom and. as a part of
that project. I will be collecting samples of the
writing of some of the students in participating
teachers' classrooms. Also. I will talk ix) those
students selected about how they feel about writing
activities.
The information gathered in this project will
appear in my Ph. D. dissertation. The location for
this study in the northern part of Michigan will be
described. but the name of the school. the names of the
teachers. and the names of the students will not be
disclosed to protect privacy.
204
In order for me to observe your child and perhaps
to use his/her writing in my study. I need your
permission. It is your prerogative not to have your
child participate in the study. It is understood that
theme will be no negative or adverse consequences for
you or for your child. However. if you do agree to
permit your child to participate in the project. please
sign the accompanying "Informed Consent Form" and
return it to your’child's teacher as soon as possible.
Thank you for your time and interest. If you have
any questions. please call me.
S/i)ncere%y.
AD/LLWL/)1$(Ja*/(Imi
Shirley M. Holmes
753-0282
205
INFORMED CONSENT FORM
Child‘s Name
As the legal parent/guardian of the above named
student. I hereby give my permission for his/her
participation in a research project conducted by
Shirley Holmes in the Saginaw Public Schools.
I understand that Ms. Holmes may observe my child
in class. collect and read my child's written work. and
that she may interview my child concerning how he/she
feels about writing activities. I understand that in-
formation gained from this project will appear in Ms.
Holmes' Ph. D. dissertation. although no mention will
be made of any names. Finally. I understand that
participation in this project may be terminated at any
time my child or I desire.
Parent/Guardian Signature
Address
Date
206
If you would be willing to participate in this
study and would like more information. please complete
the bottom portion of this page and return it to me via
inter-office mail as soon as possible.
Thank you very much for your cooperation.
Sincerely.
Shirley M. Holmes
Second Grade Teacher
Heavenrich School
776-0381 (0)
753-0282 (B)
I am interested in participating in your study.
Name
Grade Taught
School Phone
Home Phone
207
TEACHER VOLUNTEER-PARTICIPANT LETTER
3515 Wadsworth Road
Saginaw. MI 48601
March 1. 1987
Dear Colleague:
I am conducting research work for a study
entitled. "An Investigation of The Conditions Affecting
the Teaching of Composition in an Inner-city Elementary
School. Grades Kindergarten through Three: A
Descriptive Study" and need teachers in the
aforementioned grades to allow me to observe their
classrooms approximately three to four times during the
month of May. 1987.
The project also includes completing a short
questionnaire. participating in a follow-up interview.
and collecting samples of your students' writing.
Michigan State University and the Saginaw Public School
District have already approved teachers' participation
in this project.
Everything connected with this study will be kept
strictly confidential. This study is not in any way
designed to,be critical of current teaching methods.
It is designed to look at the factors affecting the
teaching of writing in an inner-city school.
APPENDIX C
STATE DOCUMENTS
208
3" STATE OF MICHIGAN
)3; ’» DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION
atheist-mano-
May 12, 1988
.A'Q‘
"A?! ”“0 OF IDUCAMN
MIMM IOIEIYS HASON
MI
WIDTH! IEAIDMOIE
”a m.
CREIIY JACOIUS
m
DI. OUMECINDO SALAS
Tm
DI. EDMUND r VANDE‘ITE
NAME m
CAIIOLL M. MUTTON
ANNETM MILLS!
NORMAN OTTO STOCKMEYEI. SI
GOV JAMES J. ILANCHAID
b-Omae
leer Ts. Wadsworth:
i am enclosing «Fltlng materials as you requested. We do not
na.: state teacrer certification requirements for writing.
Sincerely,
Jud:~;f:%-
Language Arts Specialist
Michigan Essential
Goals and Objectives
for Writing
I. n .Vlilt‘a‘; d.('l.k'li"i.ld‘il
)
0 Michigan State Board of Education
210
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Foreword .................................................................... i
Philosophy of Writing ........................................................ 1
Objectives For Using The Writing Process
Pre-Writing ................................................................. 2
Drafting .................................................................... 4
Revising ................................................................... 6
Proofreading ................................................................ 8
Publishing .................................................................. IO
Writing Instruction ........................................................... 12
Points To Consider In Evaluating A Writing Program ........................... 15
The Role Of The Administrator In The Writing Program ....................... 16
The Role Of The School Board In The Writing Program ....................... 17
Bibliography .................................................................. I 8
211
FOREWORD
The Michigan Council of Teachers of English has worked cooperatively with staff to develop
this revision of Michigan’s Essential Goals and Objectives for Writing. These objectives are
quite a departure from the last revision, as they better reflect the latest research and practice
in the teaching of writing
Please note that the objectives were written for both teacher and students. because we believe
that if writing instruction is viewed as a process, the teacher has to direct the process. We also
have included responsibilities for administrators and school board members, because they have
an essential role in a successful writing program.
As teachers are well aware, students within each level vary greatly in their ability to write. We
encourage teachers to be affirmative about each student's efforts, because a feeling of trust and
acceptance is critical to growth in writing.
In order to improve writing instruction throughout the state, we encourage district staffs to use
these objectives as a model as they develop their own objectives.
@415. (’3
Phillip E. Ru kel
Superintendent of
Public Instruction
October. I985
212
PHILOSOPHY OF WRITING
Writing can be a deeply personal act of shaping our perception of the world and our
relationships to people and things in that world. It can be a means of self-expression.
discovery. and critical thinking.
Writing is the process of selecting. developing. and arranging ideas efl'ectively. The process
requires students to write in a variety of forms (e.g.; letters. stories, journals. essays). for a
variety of purposes (e.g.; to inform. to persuade, to describe). and for a variety of audiences
(e.g.; peers. teachers. self). Students need to write to see how writing influences their thinking
and stimulates their ideas.
Each form. purpose and audience demands differences of style, approach. and word choice. A
wide variety of writing experience, therefore. is critical in order to develop effective writers.
Although it is necessary to classify writing in terms of objectives. there is no correlation
between grade level and writing maturity. To state where a student should be by such a time
would defeat a whole sense of process and the concept of the individual learner. Instruction in
writing. however. can foster continuing growth and development.
213
OBJECTIVES FOR USING
THE WRITING PROCESS
PRE-WRITING
Pre-writing is the stage in which writers generate
and discover ideas. and consider the purpose and
audience for their writing.
Virtually all experiences within the school setting
and outside of school may serve as pre-writing
activities. Some examples are using journals. reading.
researching, discussing. brainstorming. free-writing.
listening to music. and so on. These activities may
stimulate thinking. generate ideas. extend vocabulary,
and deepen concepts.
Developmental Stages For Pre—Writing
Primary
Beginning Writers tend to be egocentric. They
tend to enjoy their own ideas and to have the
confidence to share what they are thinking. They
need a wide variety of real and vicarious experiences.
Intermediate
Developing Writers tend to become aware of
audience. and therefore, benefit from small group
work. Pre-writing fills a particular need of develop-
ing writers to try out ideas before commiting them
to paper.
Middle School/Junior High
Maturing Writers tend to consider purpose and
audience and seek ways to focus their thoughts.
They begin more formally to explore their topics
and to study the writings of other authors. Therefore,
they need extended time for the pie-writing stage.
High School
Mature Writers have a clearer vision of purpose
and audience. They tend to be more self-directed in
selecting appropriate pre-writing activities. Conse-
quently, they need more time for the pre-writing
stage.
Objectives For Pre-Writing
TEACHERS
During the pre-writing stage of the writing process.
the teacher will be prepared to:
a help students recall experiences
0 help students generate ideas
oallow students to choose their own topics
0 help students to work alone, or in groups. or
with the teacher
tread literature to students frequently
Oprovide examples of writing and alternative
assignments
0 encourage and support students‘ effons
0 identify systematic procedures to explore topics
egive options regarding form and length
ehelp students consider purpose and audience
STUDENTS
During the pre-writing part of the writing process.
the student will:
0 read
edmw
o speak
0 listen
0 dramatize
0 brainstorm
0 interview
I recall
a research
0 classify
o imagine and visualize
DRAFTING
Written composition is the development, organiza-
tion and recording of the thoughts initiated in the
pre-writing stage. Drafting is discovering thoughts as
well as communicating them. Students may write
the first draft with little concern for form or
mechanics. or they may dictate ideas to a scribe.
This stage would include informal sharing with peers
or adults.
Developmental Stages For Drafting
Primary
Beginning Writers tend to produce a single draft
of most writing. Fatigue may interrupt the flow of
their ideas; conclusions are often abrupt. They as-
sume the understanding of their readers. If correctness
is not over-emphasized, beginning writers will write
more freely. and take risks to get their best thoughts
down on paper.
Intermediate
Developing Writers have internalized some of the
mechanics of writing so they can focus more on
ideas. They select language more consciously and
begin to organize more knowingly. As developing
writers sense the need for revision while they are
drafting. they may become discouraged and need
reassurance.
Middle School/Junior High
Maturing Writers consider a topic more fully. and
are more able to organize their ideas. Even in draft
form. audience and purpose are more clearly
delineated.
214
High School
Mature Writers manipulate sentence structure and
vocabulary to affect tone. They begin to develop
their individual styles, and they are able to write for
a variety of purposes and audiences.
Objectives For Drafting
TEACHERS
During the actual writing part of the writing
process. the teacher will be prepared to:
Oprovide a variety of writing materials
oact as a resource
owrite along with students
0 listen
eask questions of individuals
Otake dictation to get students started
ocreate writing situations for a variety of audi-
ences and purposes
0 suggest that students work alone or in groups
osuggest options for form and development and
length
STUDENTS
During the drafting part of the process. students
will:
ochoose a topic
euse invented spellings
orecord experiences. feelings. and ideas on paper
0 restart
oadd or delete ideas
ecreate images
oconnect ideas
oconsider audience and format
eshare writing with others
ocontinue reading and researching
REVISING
Revision is the “re-seeing” of the content of a
piece of writing. At its best. revision entails reorgani-
zation and development of subject matter. as well as
stylistic changes made to suit a writer's purpose and
intended audience. Only selected pieces of writing
should be subjected to close analysis of content and
form. depending upon the particular purpose or
audience. Students will revise if they care about the
piece they have written. Because of its substantive
nature. revision should be seen as distinct from
proofreading.
Developmental Stages For Revising
Primary
Beginning Writers tend to view revision as unnec-
essary and are confused as to where to start.
Consequently. they see revision simply as recopying
or as “adding on." They need help in “re-seeing“
their ideas.
Intermediate
Developing Writers start to recognize the needs of
their readers. to consider not only what is said but
also how it is said. Developing writers revise when
they are encouraged to do so by peers or the
teacher. Revisions tend to be piecemeal.
Middle School/Junior High
Maturing Writers tend to revise their writing for
several reasons. Not only do they see ways that they
can improve their writing. but they also accept
suggestions for improvement from teachers and peers.
Revisions may be extensive and cover organization,
tone. and style.
High School
Mature Writers feel a responsibility to their
audience. as well as to themselves and the ideas they
are trying to express. They seek help from peers and
teachers to improve drafts.
Objectives For Revising
TEACHERS
During the revising stage of the writing process.
the teacher will be prepared to:
ogive students adequate time to revise
oallow students to select pieces of writing to be
revised
Cask demonstration quesrions for clarification
Odemonstrate revision techniques
0diagnose writing problems in content and or-
ganization
oencourage peer reaction and help
ehold individual conferences with students, ask
questions. make suggestions, and offer support
STUDENTS
When revising, the student will:
oadd and delete information
Oseek help
0 refine purpose
oshare writing orally with peers
0 consider arrangement of sentences and paragraphs
Oselect precise language
ouse a personal dictionary or thesaurus
eevaluate what was written
eproject audience reaction
PROOFREADING
Proofreading is the stage of the writing process in
which the writer attends to conectness in punctuation.
spelling. word choice. usage. and so on. Correctness
is not only a courtesy the writer owes the reader.
but. in fact. the lack of correctness may affect
communication.
215
Developmental Stages For Proofreading
Primary
Beginning Writers tend to overlook mechanical
errors. or they may be very discouraged by their
inability to meet standards they do not understand.
They need help in accepting their efforts. and they
need help in finding only a few prominent or
repeated errors they can correct.
Intermediate
Developing Writers become aware of correct
standards. but they are often frustrated by the extent
of their problems. They need help in searching their
writing for selected types of errors. and help in
keeping records on their most common problems.
Middle School/Junior High
Maturing Writers begin to see the significance of
correctness in form. but they need help in accepting
responsibility for errors in their writing and in using
resources to help them determine appropriate forms.
High School
Mature Writers are anxious to present their writ-
ten work in its best form for their readers. and they
use a variety of resources and techniques to insure
correct results.
Objectives For Proofreading
TEACHERS
When teaching proofreading. the teacher will be
prepared to:
Oselect only certain skills for attention at one
time
edemonstrate proofreading techniques
oreview known skills
eencourage peer help
ohelp edit student writing
eprovide support lessons on skill needs that are
evident in students‘ writing
STUDENTS
When proofreading. the student will:
oconect sentence fragments and run-on sentences
when appropriate
ecorrect sentence syntax errors
ecorrect errors in usage. such as lack of subject-
verb agreement. incorrect verb tense. and so on
ocorrect punctuation and capitalization
ocorrect illegible handwriting
0 correct format problems. such as irregular margins.
missing indentations. and so on
eidentify and correct misspelled words
PUBLISHING
Only selected pieces of writing will be taken to the
final stage of publishing in the classroom. Although
some publishing is beneficial for young writers. only
limited time. effort. and value should be given to it
in contrast to time. effort. and value given to
pre-writing. drafting. and sharing Perfection should
not be expected in published writing. particularly in
the writing of beginning and developing writers.
Developmental Stages For Publishing
Primary
Beginning Writers are more motivated to write
when their attempts are posted in the classroom or
the school. or when they are shared in a special way
with parents. Individual or class booklets of student
writing should be shared with the class. the school.
and the community.
Intermediate
Developing Writers will make special efforts in
revision and proofreading in order to publish their
work for the class. the school. and the community.
Because they are frequently discouraged by the mag-
nitude of the task. they need help. encouragement.
and recognition.
Middle School/Junior High
Maturing Writers need opportunities to bring their
writing to its final polished form. These writers
begin to identify their own audiences and benefit
from the freedom and encouragement to do so.
High School
Mature Writers try to correct all errors. They may
seek wider audiences for their publishable work.
(e.g.. student literary magazines. writing contests.
local newspapers). They need help in locating and
selecting appropriate publishing opportunities.
Objectives For Publishing
TEACHERS
Upon completion of some pieces of written work.
the teacher will be prepared to:
eprovide typed copies of students' work when
possible
0 display the writing within or outside the classroom
eprovide bookmaking materials
0 provide publishing opportunities in class booklets.
classroom newspapers. and so on
eidentify magazines. contests. and other outlets
for publishing outside the school for students
who seek these forms of publication
oassist students in preparing their writing for
publication
STUDENTS
After proofreading. a student will:
eprepare corrected copy for publication
oadd illustrations. if possible
Oshare writing with appropriate audiences
0 display writing in the classroom or school building
Oseek ways to share writing with parents
eenjoy the published writing of classmates
WRITING INSTRUCTION“
All teachers should have responsibility for helping
students improve their writing skills. Worksheets.
blank-filling exercises. multiple choice tests, and simi-
lar materials avoid having students write. Providing
opportunities for students to write may often be
overlooked as viable objectives during program
planning. If students are not being asked to write
sentences and paragraphs about science, history. gee
ography and the other school subjects. the school is
not providing the guidance and practice students
need to become better writers.
In homes and the greater community as well,
emphasis should be placed on writing as an impor-
tant means of communication. Frequently. visual.
oral. mechanical and technical skills are encouraged.
and writing skills are neglected or overlooked. A
climate of words should be built. and role models,
experiences, and opportunities should be provided
outside of the school environment, so that students
are stimulated and encouraged to develop and use
writing as an important tool of communication.
General Implications
oState teacher certification requirements should
be expanded to include college credits for writing
instruction, as well as for reading
0 Districts should provide teacher in-service oppor-
tunities on writing instruction and the integra-
tion of writing experiences into the total cur-
riculum.
oTeacher in-service research grants should be
offered for communication skills as an integrated
package, rather than for each subject area in
isolation.
0 Higher education institutions which offer teacher
training should offer courses on “How to Teach
Integrated Communication Skills.”
0 Districts should adopt a writing philosophy and
plan a K—lZ writing program based upon the
staffs philosophy of writing. Planning should
include staff from all content areas.
0 If a district elects to assess its students in writing.
the assessment should be based upon holistic or
primary trait scoring of at least two writing
samples per student. Test items are available
through the Michigan Department of Education.
If test items and scoring criteria from the depart-
ment are used. it is important for validity that
the items not be altered in any way. A district
should use its own teachers to score the papers
because the scoring procedures serve as valuable
professional development activities.
'Taken from the 1982-83 Writing Education Inter-
pretive Report. Michigan Educational Assessment
Program
216
0 Encourage publication of good student writing in
school newspapers. literary journals, local news-
papers, and magazines.
0 See that the high school‘s best writers are entered
into the NCT E Achievement Awards in Writing
Program or the Scholastic Writing Awards or
other writing contests. Let everyone know that
writing matters to you.
Instructional Implications
0 Provide opportunities for students to write every
day. Daily writing is the ideal; once a week is
not often enough. All writing does not have to
be graded or even read by the teacher. It may be
read by other students. parents, or it may be a
journal entry. But students should write each
day beginning in kindergarten and continuing
throughout all levels.
0 Have students write in a variety of forms, for a
variety of purposes. and for a variety of audiences.
eProvide many opportunities for impromptu
writing This affords students a chance to write
their thoughts down on paper with some sem-
blance of correctness.
0 Instruction should follow a developmental process.
Students move from personal. subjective. imagi-
native kinds of writing to objective. expository
writing.
0 Writing instruction should take place within the
framework of the writing process although writ-
ing does not depend upon sequential skills.
0 Provide students with topics of interest to write
about — preferably several topics from which they
may choose.
0 Limit instruction in grammar and mechanics in
isolation. because application is dependent upon
the students‘ abilities to express themselves in an
organized way. Some knowledge of grammar is
useful. but too much time spent on the study of
grammar steals time from the Study of writing.
Time is much better spent in writing and confer-
ring with the teacher or other students about
each attempt to communicate in writing
0 Provide instruction and time on task opportuni-
ties for students to practice their writing skills in
all disciplines (science, health. music, art, social
studies. etc.). Do not limit writing to the English
composition classes. Teachers should have plenty
of writing supplies — writing paper. teacher
materials. duplicating and copying machines.
dictionaries. books about writing. and classroom
libraries of good books.
217
0 Provide well-planned integrated listening, speaking,
reading and writing activities.
eBe primarily interested in the content. not the
mechanics of expression. It‘s easy to spot
misspellings, faulty word usage. and shaky
punctuation. Perfection in these escapes most
adults. so do not demand it of students. Mark
only a few mechanical errors when grading.
leaving others for another time. What matters
most in writing are ideas, and the words and
sentences that express the ideas. Perfection in
mechanics develops slowly. Be patient.
0 Be afiirmative about the child‘s efforts in school
writing. Recognize that for every error a child
makes, he or she will do many things right.
Applaud the good things you see. The willing-
ness to write is fragile. Your optimistic attitude
toward the student‘s efforts is vital to strengthening
the writing habit.
0 Check to see if there is continuing contact with
the imaginative writing of skilled authors. While
it’s true we learn to write by writing. we also
learn to write by reading The works of talented
authors should be studied not only for ideas but
also for the writing techniques involved. Good
literature is an essential part of any effective
writing program.
0 Encourage the use of writing folders both at
home and at school. Most writing should be
kept, not thrown away. Folders are an important
means for helping both teachers and students see
progress in writing skill. ‘
POINTS TO CONSIDER
IN EVALUATING A
WRITING PROGRAM
When evaluating a writing program. the following
areas need to be considered in addition to an
examination of the writing process and writing
products.
EMOTIONAL CLIMATE
0 evidence of students‘ interests and hobbies
e evidence that students listen to each other and
that teachers listen to students
0 evidence that teachers and students talk about
the writing process and about pieces of writing
PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT
0 access to library
0 availability of assorted pencils, pens, papers (lined
and unlined)
0 easy access to necessary resources (dictionaries.
thesauri, encyclopedias, and so on)
0 displays of the works of prominent authors
0 displays of students‘ writing pieces
0 examples of writing forms
0 availability of word processors and typewriters
TEACHER
0 offers writing opportunities frequently and regu-
larly
o integrates writing into content areas
0 writes and shares her/his own writing with
students
orequires writing in all subject areas
0 promotes sensitivity to vocabulary and language
Oexpects erratic development of students‘ writing
abilities
O shares own delight with precise. powerful vocabu-
lary and language
0 meets regularly with colleagues to share successes
and frustrations of writing experiences
Ocommunicates the writing process to parents
ocollects samples of students‘ writing throughout
the school year in order to determine growth in
writing
0 reads aloud exemplary writing
STUDENT
eexpects to write daily
0 is aware of stages of the writing process
eis willing to take risks in trying to express
her/his ideas in writing
econfers with peers and teachers about pieces of
writing at all stages
0 evaluates her/his own writing for purposes, form.
and content
econsiders writing a means of discovery. as well
as a means of communication
AUDIENCE
0 students are encouraged to share their writing
both formally and informally
o audiences other than peers are provided
Oparents and community groups are informed
about the writing program and encouraged to
support it
218
THE ROLE OF THE
ADMINISTRATOR IN THE
WRITING PROGRAM
The writing program refers to those identifiable
written composition activities of the tatal curriculum.
As such. the writing strand of language development
should be found in all areas. and student skills
should be nurtured by all school personnel, particu-
larly the building administrator.
THE BUILDING ADMINISTRATOR . . .
ewrites and lets students and faculty see the
significance of writing to her/him.
esupervises the writing program through regular
classroom visits.
eprovides leadership by stating the goals of the
writing program and by appropriating funds for
materials and activities. including professional
in-service on writing
0 with teachers, articulates the goals of the writing
program to parents. the community, and other
interested persons.
0 promotes writing as an all-school activity.
osupports staff review and possible modification
of the existing writing program. including class-
room activities and strategies.
oencourages innovative curricular changes and
instructional approaches to facilitate language
growth.
0 encourages teachers to create language-rich class-
room environments.
oreads student writing and encourages student
authors.
oencourages the publication of student writing in
newsletters and publications for parents and others.
a evaluates the effectiveness of the existing program.
0 identifies areas needing improvement, and sup-
ports needed change.
THE ROLE OF THE
SCHOOL BOARD IN THE
WRITING PROGRAM
THE SCHOOL BOARD MEMBERS...
ewrite. and let faculty, students. and administra-
tors see the significance of writing to them.
eset policy on the importance of writing.
oread student writing. and encourage and com-
mend young authors.
0 provide the financial support necessary to oper-
ate a quality language program.
Glisten to teachers‘ concerns about the writing
program and seek ways to solve these problems.
eencourage innovative curricular practices.
esupport professional development activities to
improve staff skills.
SELECTED
PROFESSIONAL
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bissex. Blenda. GYNS AT WRK: A Child Learns to
Write and Read. Boston. Harvard University Press.
I980.
Burrows. Alvina Treut and Others. They All Want
to Write/Written English in the Elementary School.
4th ed.. l-Iamden, Connecticut. Library Professional
Publication. I984.
219
Calkins. Luce McCormick, Lessons from a Child.
Exeter. NH. Heinemann Educational Books, 1983.
Edward. Pat, “101 Ways to Publish Student Writing.”
in R. D. Walshe. ed., Better Reading. Better Writing.
Now. Epping, New South Wales. Primary Teaching
Association. 1977.
Elbow. Peter. Writing with Power: Techniques for
Mastering the Writing Press. New York. Oxford
University Press. 1981.
Graves. Donald. Writing: Teachers and Children at
Work. Exeter, NH, Heinemann Educational Books,
1983.
Graves. Donald, A Researcher Learns to Write:
Selected Articles and Monographs. Exeter. New
Hampshire: I-Ieineman Educational Books, 1984.
Haines, MaryEllen, A Two- Way Street: Reading to
Write/Writing to Read. Michigan Department of
Education, Michigan Council of Teachers of
English. I982.
Haley-James. Shirley. Perspectives on Writing in
Grades [—8. Urbana. IL, National Council of Teach-
ers of English, 1981.
Hays. Janice and Others. The Writer‘s Mind: Writ-
ing as 0 Mode of Thinking. Urbana. IL. National
Council of Teachers of E nglish. I983.
Hennings, Dorothy Grant and Barbara Moll Grant.
Written Expression in the Language Arts. New York.
Teachers‘ College Press. l98l.
Jackson. Jacqueline, Turn Not Pale. Beloved Snail:
A Book About Writing Among Other Things. Little.
Brown & Company, 1974.
Koch. Kenneth. Rose. Where Did You Get That
Red? Teaching Great Poetry to Children. New York.
Vintage Books, 1974.
Moffett, James and Betty Jane Weaver. Student-
Centered Language Arts and Reading. K-l3. Boston.
Houghton-Mifflin & Co., 1976.
National Council of Teachers of English. How to
Help Your Child Become A Better Writer. Urbana.
IL. 1980.
Rico, Gabriele Lusser, Writing the Natural Way:
Using the Right-Brain Techniques to Release Your
Expressive Powers. Los Angeles, J. P. Tarcer. Inc..
1983.
Stewig, John. Read to Write— Using Children’s
Literature as a Springboard to Writing. 2nd ed..
New York. Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1980.
Temple. Charles and Others. The Beginnings of
Writings. Boston. Allyn & Bacon. Inc., 1982.
Turbil, Jan, No Better Way to Teach Writing. Exeter.
NH, Heinmann Educational Books. 1982.
Tway, Eileen. Time for Writing in the Elementary
School. Urbana. IL, National Council of Teachers of
English, 1984.
Zinsser, William. On Writing Well. New York. Harper
& Row, 1980.
220
This document was prepared by:
The Michigan State Board of Education
Bureau of Educational Services
Teressa V. Staten. Associate Superintendent
instructional Specialists Program
Anne L. Hansen. Supervisor
Edited by:
Judy Hood, Language Arts Specialist
Acknowledgements and thanks are given to members of the Michigan Council of Teachers of English:
Janet Culver Stella Liu
Okemos Public Schools Wayne State University
Linda Dinan Diane Orchard
Shepherd Public Schools Lapcer Community Schools
Sheila Fitzgerald Mary Ellen VanCamp
Michigan State University Saranac Community Schools
Janet Glowe Alan Weber
Napoleon Community Schools Alma Public Schools
Ronald Kat
Detroit Public Schools
June. 1986
WWW STATE BOARD OF EDUCATION
STATEMENT OF ASSURANCE 0F MIRIAM?! WITH FEDERAL LAW
The Michigan State Board of Education complies with all Federal laws
and regulations prohibiting discrimination and with all requirements and
regulations at the us. Department of Education. It is the policy at the
Michigan State Board of Education that no person on the basis at race.
color. religion. national origin or anceary. age. sex. marital status or
handicap shall be discriminated against. excluded from participation in.
denied the benefits of or otherwise be subjected to discrimination in any
program or activity tor which it is responsible or tor which it receives
tinaneial assistance from the 0.8. Department 0! Education.
APPENDIX D
LOCAL SCHOOL DISTRICT DOCUMENTS
221
LANGUAGE ARTS PHILOSOPHY
The first priority of the Board of Education is to
provide quality education opportunities in language arts,
mathematics, science, social studies, and the fine arts.
The Language Arts program of the Public Schools is
designed to improve all students’ awareness of the important role
that the English language and its literature play in their lives.
The program is also designed to make students aware of the uses, in
public and private discourse, of the English language and its
literature. Essential to the overall program of studies, the
English program emphasizes reading, writing, speaking, and
listening. Specifically, the program emphasizes the development of
the powers of comprehension, of critical thinking, engagement, and
of coherence, cogency, and fluency in the expression and
communication of ideas through oral and written composition.
Additionally, the English program is designed to provide experiences
and activities, particularly in literature and classroom
interaction, that will promote life-long learning, and an awareness
and appreciation of the human condition. In their reading and
interactions, all students will encounter human aspirations,
foibles, courage, cowardice, vulnerability, nobility of character,
and integrity that should contribute to the students’ emotional and
spiritual maturity. Students will be guided, through their studies,
to develop a sense of responsibility for becoming personally
involved in what they write and say and fur the accuracy of their
222
statements. Through literature and reactions to it, students will
develop imagination and aesthetic appreciation. This development
will also provide enjoyable leisure-time activities.
223
Lingygce ART§ GOAL sxitgnguts
BEAM
1.
2.
6.
7.
Develop and reinforce each pupil 's reading power to the
aaxiaua level.
Develop and reinforce understanding and interpretation of
content aaterial and build independence in the use of study
skills.
Develop within each pupil a desire and enjoy-eat for reading
and an understanding and appreciation of aaterials of literary
quality.
Identify and correct reading difficulties.
laprove students' awareness of the iaportance of and uses of
the English language and its literature.
Assist students in the develop-ant of the powers of coapre-
hension, critical thinking, and fluency in the acceptance
of ideas.
Proaote life-long learning in all students.
Assist students in the acquisition of basic skills, inquiry
skills, and coaaunication.
Assist students in the preparation through reading of a
responsiveness to citizenship in an ever-changing social,
econoaic, and political environaent.
ERLIINE
l.
2.
d.
5.
7.
Assist students in the develop-eat of the powers of coapre-
hension, critical thinking, and fluency in the expression
of ideas.
Assist students in bacon-ing responsible for what they say
and write.
Assist students in the acquisition of basic skills, inquiry
skills, and coaaunication as these relate to writing.
Identify and correct writing difficulties.
Assist students in understanding that writing is thinking
and thetfthlnhingraagrbe expressed and clarified by writing.
Assist students in asking language choices wisely, that is,
how things any be put and how things should be and can be
taken.
Develop and expand to the aaxiaua the repertory of language
resources on can eaploy --- froa vocabulary to punctuation,
9.
p
2.
I.
4.
7.
9.
224
phrasing and sentence structure, to style and dialect, points
of view and coapositional fora.
Develop and extend to the aaxiaun the fluency, facility,
pleasure, and depth with which one can write.
Develop and expand to the aaxiaua the range, depth, and re-
finement of the inborn thinking operations (classifying,-
generalising, inferring, and problea-solving) as they relate
to writing.
Assist students in heading coasunication signals from all
sources.
Assist students in gaining access to all sources of infor-
nation, inside and outside oneself.
Assist students in finding out what the environ-ant shows,
what other people know, what the records show, and what the
asdta convey.
Discraaunate different sources and abstraction levels of
inforaation and understand what each is worth.
Develop and enlarge to its fullest the range of what one can
conceive, trans-it, and respond to and of how one can conceive,
transait, and respond.
(ind out what various aedia can and cannot do---language, body
expression, graphic arts, aovies, and television, competing
with and coapleaenting each other.
hecoae faailiar with all roles-o-sendpr, receiver, subject---
and with the various distances and relations along thea---
con-unicating to oneself, to known individuals, reaote audiences,
for exaaple, or coasunicating about oneself, firsthand subjects,
abstract subjects, and so on.
Develop and expand to the aaxiaua the range, depth, and re-
fineaent of inborn thinking operations (see above) as they
relate to speaking and listening.
Develop and extend to the aaxiaua the fluency, facility,
pleasure, and depth with which one listens and speaks.
225
Kindergarten .
Curriculum Guidelines
(PARTIAL DOCUMENT)
L— School District of the City of
226
PRE-READING AND
PRE-MATH SKILLS KINDERGARTEN
'PRE-READING AND PRE-MATH SKILLS
AUDITORY DISCRIMINATION AND MEMORY
The child will be able to verbally identify the sounds
of.rhythm instruments (e.g., triangle, drum, rhythm
sticks). .
The child will be able to point, while eyes are closed,
in the direction from which a sound comes.
'The child will be able to identify characters from a
familiar story when given certain clues.
The child will supply 3 different appropriate sound
effects in a familiar story.
The child will demonstrate ability to discriminate between
loud and soft sounds by performing certain actions loudly
or softly as requested.
The Child will demonstrate ability to discriminate between
loud and soft musical tones by tiptoeing when hearing soft
music and stamping feet when hearing loud music.
Upon hearing music with ascending and descending melodies,
the child will respond with body to indicate hearing the
changes in pitch.
The child will indicate by answering "yes" or "no" whether
two sound patterns are alike-or different.
The child will identify 5 given sounds over a background
of music.
Given pairs of words orally, the child will indicate
by answering "yes" or "no" whether the words rhyme or
do not rhyme.
The child will reproduce a simple rhythm pattern from
memory.
The child will supply at least 3 events from a short
story which has just been told or read to him.
227
PRE-READING AND
PRE-MATH SKILLS‘ KINDERGARTEN
The child will repeat a series of 5 numerals (1-9) in
a given order.
The child will name the days of the week in sequence.
The child will be able to select 3 objects having a
common property from a set of A objects (3 objects
would be the same and 1 different).
The child will be able to select the different object
from a set of 4 objects (3 of which possess a common
property, 1 of which does not).
The child will be able to match 1 object to a given
object from a set of 4 objects with like characteristics.
Given a series of 5 pictures, the child will select
the one which is different in detail from the others.
Given a simple puzzle of 6 to 8 pieces, the child will
solve the puzzle by fitting the pieces together to
form a picture within 15 minutes. .
The child will demonstrate perception of a given pattern
of a 5 component sequence by continuing the pattern
correctly. '
Given a series of 5 pictures, the child will select
the one which is different in terms of direction and
placement.
In a familiar, but incomplete picture, the child will
complete one readily identifiable missing part.
In a picture containing familiar objects which has
10 obvious errors, the child will correctly identify
8 errors out of the 10.
The child will be able to identify a particular
object, shape, or figure from the total background
in a simple picture.
The child will be able to arrange a set of 3 pictures
in sequential order from left to right.
228
READING: RESOURCE KINDERGARTEN
READING OBJECTIVES
WORD IDENTIFICATION STRAND
l.
2.
10.
The learner will name upper case letters presented
in random order.
'The learner will name lower case letters presented
in random order.
The learner will match lower case letters with
upper case letters.
The learner will differentiate between left and
right.
The learner will name a series of objects, pictures,
or symbols in left to right progression.
The learner will identify words that rhyme.
The learner will tell if two given words have the
same initial consonant sound.
The learner will orally reproduce a 7-8 syllable
sentence of familiar content.
The learner will identify his own name from a list
of five names.
The learner will use spoken context as a clue to a
missing word.
COMPREHENSION STRAND
1.
The learner will answer questions relating to the
literal meaning of material that has been read to
him. (who, what, where, when)
The learner will put in order illustrations from a
story he has heard.
The learner will listen and retell a story with the
main ideas in correct sequence.
The learner will predict an ending for an orally
presented story.
229
READING: RESOURCE KINDERGARTEN
S. The learner will select an appropriate title for a story
he has heard.
6. The learner will relate personal incidents for language
experience stories.
7. The learner will retell, using the third person, personal
incidents related by his peers.
8. The learner will identify the speaker after listening to
a story with conversation.
9. The learner will follow a verbal direction which has two
steps.
10. The learner will match pictures that form opposite pairs.
11. The learner will use new words discussed in class.
REFERENCES/STUDY SKILLS STRAND
l.
2.
3.
The learner will group objects and/or pictures into
categories and state the relationship.
The learner will tell what a calendar is used for:
the name of the month, the dates and the day of the
week.
The learner will know his address and his telephone
number.
LITERARY STRAND
l.
2.
The learner will respond with interest and enjoyment
to orally presented material.
The learner will recite simple nursery rhymes and
poems with his peers.
The learner will participate in dramatizations of.
familiar stories and/or rhymes.
230
Elementary
. _ Language Arts
' Guide ‘
(PARTIAL DOCUMENT)
Grades 1 - 6‘. ‘
School District of the City of
231.
PREFACE
This handbook of language arts objectives has been written
to define the goals of the language arts program. grades one through
six (1-6). for the School District of the City of Michigan.
The guide is divided into grade level objectives. These
objectives are identified by a numerical code:
Grade One loo-199
Grade Two 200-299
Grade Three 300-399
Grade Four 400-499
Grade Five 500-599
Grade Six 600-699
___.1. ___.2. etc.
indicate closely
related parts of a
single objective.)
Each grade level is further subdivided into nine (9) strands.
The code letters for each objective indicate the strand:
1. Grammar and Usage G
2. Mechanics M
3. Penmanship P
4. word Study WS
5. Reference and Study Skills RS
6. Literature Appreciation LA
7. Composition C
8. Speaking and Listening SL
9. Spelling 5
As well as indicating the grade level and strand of each
objective. the objective number additionally reflects the spiraling
effect of the curriculum. A particular skill can be traced
through successive grades by looking only at the objective number.
For instance, G-lOl is in the grammar and usage strand (as indicated
by the "6"). and asks the student to use COMPLETE SENTENCES (as
indicated by the "01"). Similarly. the "01" in G-ZOl, indicates
that the second grade student is asked to use COMPLETE SENTENCES.
This carries on through the sixth grade. Another feature of each
objective is the underlined. capitalized words. This indicates the
critical attribute of each objective.
The above numbering system holds true for seven (7) of the
nine (9) strands. The speaking and listening strand and the
spelling strand are ungraded. They are ungraded because. in most
instances. they apply to. and should be stressed in. all six
grades.
1232
GRADE ONE LANGUAGE ARTS OBJECTIVES
GRAMMAR AND USAGE
GlOl The student will use COMPLETE SENTENCES in oral expression.
6102 The student will be introduced to TELLING, ASKING and
EXCLAIMING sentences.
6103 The student will CHOOSE the APPROPRIATE WORD to complete
a sentence. (C. A.T. )
G104 I The student will use the appropriate PRONOUNS and SINGULAR
and PLURAL NOUNS. (C.A.T.)
MECHANICS
Capitalization:
M111 The student will be introduced to capitalization of
BEGINNING WORDS of SENTENCES.
M112 The student will be introduced to capitalization of the
PRONOUN "I" and PROPER nouns.
Punctuation:
M121 The student will be introduced to the correct use of END
MARKS for SENTENCES (., 7. 1).
M122 The student will be introduced to the correct use of
COMMAS as signals to pause in oral reading.
M123 The student will be introduced to QUOTATION MARKS in
SPOKEN WORDS.
M124 The student will be introduced to APOSTROPHES in CONTRACTIONS.
M125 The student will be introduced to the use of the PERIOD
in ABBREVIATIONS.
PENMANSHIP
P131 The student will learn the correct WAY 2Q HOLD 3 PENCIL.
P132 The student will learn the correct PLACEMENT of the PAPER.
depending on right or left handedness.
P133 The student will use the correct FORM of upper and lower
case manuscript LETTERS.
M134 The student will MATCH UPPER WITH LOWER CASE LETTERS in
manusc ript wri ting .
233
P135 The student will use correct SIZE in manuscript writing.
P136 The student will correctly SPACE manuscript LETTERS when
writing words and sentences.
P137 The student will write NEATLY and LEGIBLY.
P138 The student will be introduced to MARGINS and READINGS.
w
WSl4l The student will recognize RHYMING WORDS.
WSl42 The student will be exposed to CONTRACTIONS in context
and the words from which the contraction is made.
WSl43 The student will be exposed to common ABBREVIATIONS.
WSl44 The student will identify a COMPOUND WORD by recognizing
the component words. (See Reading WI-106.)
WSl45 The student will match words with their SYNONYMS.
(C.A.T./MEAP)
WSl46 The student will be introduced to words and their ANTONYMS.
(MEAP)
WSl48 The student will match given associations to form ANALOGIES.
(MEAP) (See Reading C-llO.)
WSl49 The student will be introduced to BASE WORDS. PREFIXES.
and SUFFIXES. (MEAP) (See Reading WI-lOS.)
w5150 The student will be made-aware that the dictionary may be
used to divide words into SYLLABLES.
REFERENCE AND STUDY SKILLS
R5161 The student will arrange words in ALPHABETICAL ORDER
using the first letter only. (MEAP) (See Reading R121.)
Dictionary:
RSl62.l The student will be introduced to a PICTURE DICTIONARY.
R5162.2 The student will choose the correct word when given its
oral DEFINITION. (C.A.T./MEAP)
Parts of a Book:
R5163 The student will use the TABLE 9: CONTENTS. (MEAP) (See
Reading R8102.)
1234
Reference Sources:
R5164
The student will be aware of reference sources in
LIBRARIES . (MEAP)
Study Skills:
R5165.1
R5165.2
R5165.3
m7lOl
LA171.2
LA172
LA173
C181
C182
C184
C186
The student will be introduced to a PHYSICAL STUDY
ENVIRONMENT that is condusive to learning: adequate
lighting and ventilation. good posture. appropriate space
and materials. and limited distractions.
The student will be introduced to an ATTITUDINAL STUDY
ENVIRONMENT that is condusive to learning: following
directions. developing independent work and thinking
habits. developing questioning techniques. staying on and
completing tasks. and developing self-motivation.
The student will PROOFREAD all work.
LITERATURE APPRECIATION
The student will be exposed to a VARIETY of LITERATURE
by being READ 39 daily by teacher.
The student will be exposed to a VARIETY of LITERATURE
by READING self-chosen materials daily (such as USSR:
undisturbed sustained silent reading).
The student will tell if a selection is REAL or MAKE-
BELIEVE. (See Reading L-lOl.)
The student will identify FEELINGS and EMOTIONS of
CHARACTERS. (CAT) (See Reading L—lOZ.)
COMPOSITION
The student will develop PRE-WRITING SKILLS by: dictating
sentences. organizing class experience stories. dictating
personal stories. and illustrating stories.
The student will WRITE a SENTENCE.
The student will WRITE a SHORT SELECTION.
The student will be introduced to TECHNIQUES of
PROOPREADING: content. sentence structure. grammar and
usage. spelling. and mechanics.
235
Additionally. the objectives have been correlated with the
Michigan Educational Assessment Program (MEAP) and the California
Achievement Test (CAT). When an objective is tested in MEAP or
CAT it will be indicated (in parenthesis) directly after the objective.
These objectives are not meant to be limiting. Each child
should be encouraged and inspired to learn as much. each year. as
his/her abilities allow. These objectives are meant simply to
show the necessary attainment of language arts skills at each grade
level.
6201 The student will use correct word order in saying and
writing COMPLETE SENTENCES.
G202 The student will recognize the four KINDS 9E SENTENCES:
telling, asking. exclaiming. and commanding. (C.A.T.)
6203 The student will CHOOSE the APPROPRIATE WORD to complete
a sentence. (C.A.T.)
G204 The student will recognize and use the appropriate PARTS
QE SPEECH: NOUNS (singular and plural). PRONOUNS. VERBS
(regular and irregular). and ADJECTIVES (degree). (C.A.T.)
6205 The student will be introduced to SENTENCE STRUCTURE by
dividing sentences into SUBJECT and PREDICATE.
MECHANICS
Capitalization:
M211 The student will correctly capitalize EEGINNING WORDS of
SENTENCES. (C.A.T.)
M212 The students will correctly capitalize the PRONOUN "I".
PROEEE NOUNS (holidays. months. days of the week. place
names), and TITLES (people). (C.A.T.)
Punctuation:
M221 The student will recognize and use correct END MARKS for
SENTENCES (e. ?p I). (C.A.T.)
M222.l The student will recognize and use COMMAS with words in a
SERIES and DATES. (C.A.T.)
M222.2 The student will be introduced to the correct use of
COMMAS in QUOTATION .
M223 The student will be introduced to QUOTATION MARKS for
SPOKEE WORDS.
M224 The student will correctly use APOSTROPHES in CONTRACTIONS
and POSSESSIVES. (C.A.T.)
M225 The student will correctly use PERIODS in ABBREVIATIONS.
PENMANSHIP
9231 The student will correctly HOLD 2 PENCIE.
236
GRADE TWO LANGUAGE ARTS OBJECTIVES
GRAMMAR AND USAGE
P232
P233
P234
P235
P236
P237
P238
w524l
W8242
W5243
W5244
W524S
W5246
W5247
W5248
W5249
WSZSO.1
W8250.2
1237
The student will correctly POSITION the PAPER. depending
on right or left handedness.
The student will correctly FORM upper and lower case
manuscript LETTERS.
The student will MATCH UPPER WITH LOWER CASE letters in
manuscript writing.
The student will use the correct SIZE in manuscript writing.
The student will correctly SPACE manuscript LETTERS when
writing words. sentences. and paragraphs.
The student will write NEATLY and LEGIBLY.
The student will correctly use MARGINS. READINGS, and
INDENTATIONS.
w
The student will recognize RHYMING WORDS and ALLITERATIONS.
The student will recognize CONTRACTIONS in context and
identify the words from which the contraction is made.
(C.A.T.) (See Reading WI-ZlO.)
The student will use common ABBREVIATIONS.
The student will identify COMPOUND WORDS by recognizing
the component words. (C.A.T.)
The student will match words with their SYNONYMS.
(C.A.T./MEAP) ——
The student will match words with their ANTONYMS.
(C.A.T./MEAP)
The student will be introduced to HOMONYMS - same sound.
may have same spelling. differ in meaning (peer - to
look searchingly. 0R peer - person with equal standing.
0R pier - a dock).
The student will select an appropriate item to complete
an ANALOGY. (MEAP) (See Reading C—210.)
The student will be able to divide an AFFIXED WORD into
a BASE WORD and its PREFIX and/or SUFFIX. (C.A.T./MEAP)
(See Reading WI205.)
The student will use the dictionary to divide words into
SYLLABLES. (C.A.T.)
The student will tell an APPROPRIATE MEANING for a word
from the dictionary definitions. (C.A.T./MEAP) (See
Reading C-212.)
238
REFERENCE AND STUDY SKILLS
R5261 The student will arrange words in ALPHABETICAL ORDER
using the first and second letters. (MEAP) (See Reading
R5201.)
Dictionary:
R5262.1 The student will have practice in using the DICTIONARY.
R5262.2 The student will choose the correct word when given its
DEFINITION. (C.A.T./MEAP)
Parts of a Book:
R5263 The student will use a TABLE 2E CONTENTS. (MEAP) (See
Reading R5202.)
Reference Sources:
R5264 The student will be introduced to reference sources:
ATLAS, DICTIONARY, ENCYCLOPEDIA. and MAPS. (C.A.T./MEAP)
(See Reading R5203.)
Study Skills:
R5265.1 The student will maintain a PHYSICAL STUDY ENVIRONMENT
that is condusive to learning: adequate lighting and
ventilation. good posture. appropriate space and materials.
and minimal distractions.
R5265.2 The student will maintain an ATTITUDINAL STUDY ENVIRONMENT
that is condusive to learning: following directions.
developing independent work and thinking habits.
developing questioning techniques. staying on and
completing tasks. and developing self-motivation.
R5265.3 The student will PROOFREAD all work.
LITERATURE APPRECIATION
LA271.1 The student will be exposed to a VARIETY of LITERATURE
by being READ 29 daily by teacher.
LA271.2 The student will be exposed to a VARIETY of LITERATURE
by READING self-chosen materials daily (such as USSR:
undisturbed sustained silent reading).
LA272 The student will tell if a selection is REAL QE MAKE-
BELIEVE. (See Reading L-201.)
LA273 The student will identify FEELINGS and EMOTIONS 9E
CHARACTERS. (C.A.T.) (See Reading L-202 and L-203.)
LA274
LA275
LA276
C281
C282
C283
C284
C285
C286
239
The student will identify the SETTING (where and when) of
a selection. (C.A.T./MEAP) '
The student will indicate the AUTHOR'S PURPOSE in a
given selection. (MEAP) (See Reading C-211.)
The student will be introduced to FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE.
COMPOSITION
The student will be exposed to PRE-WRITING SKILEE:
choosing a topic and writing a draft.
The student Will WRITE ORIGINAL SENTENCES.
The student will be introduced to PARAGRAPH CONSTRUCTION:
topic sentence. supporting sentences. and sentence sequence.
The student will WRITE ORIGINAE SELECTIONS: stories and
poems.
The student will be introduced to the CORRECT FORM in
writing: invitations. thank you notes. and friendly
letters.
The student will use the TECHNIQUES 9E PROOFREADING:
content, sentence structure. grmmnar and usage. spelling,
and mechanics.
6301
SENTENCES.
6302 The student will recognize the four KINDS OF SENTENCES:
telling, asking. exclaiming. and commanding. (C. A.T. )
6303 The student will CHOOSE the APPROPRIATE WORD to complete
a sentence. (C. A.T.
6304 The student will recognize and use the appropriate PARTS
OF SPEECH: NOUNS (singular. plural and possessive).
PRONOUNS. VERBS (regular and irregular. tense and agree-
ment). ADJECTIVES (degree). and ADVERBS. (C.A.T.)
6305 The student will identify: simple and complete SUBJECTS.
simple and complete PREDICATES, compound SUBJECTS. and
VERBS. (C.A.T.)
6306 The student will learn to avoid DOUBLE NEGATIVES.
6307 The student will be introduced to TRANSITIONAL WORDS (in
fact, however. therefore. for example. if. until. unless).
MECHANICS
Capitalization:
M311 The student will correctly capitalize BEGINNING WORDS _£
SENTENCES. (C. A. T )
M312 The student will correctly capitalize the PRONOUN "I".
PROPER NOUNS (holidays. months. days of the week. place
names). and TITLES (people. books. stories). (C. A. T. )
Punctuation:
M321 The student will recognize and use correct END MARKS for
SENTEN____C;_ES (.. ?. I). (C. AT )
M322.1 The student will recognize and correctly use COMMAS with
a SERIES. DATES. QUOTATION . and PLACE NAMES. (C.A.T.)
M322.2 The student will be introduced to the correct use of
COMMAS in INTRODUCTORY WORDS and SPLIT QUOTATION .
M323 The student will correctly use QUOTATION MARKS in DIRECT
QUOTATIONS and TITLES.
M324 The student will correctly use APOSTROPHES in CONTRACTIONS.
240
GRADE THREE LANGUAGE ARTS OBJECTIVES
GRAMMAR AND USAGE.
The student will recognize. say and write COMPLETE
POSSESSIVES. and PLURALS of LETTERS and NUMBERS USED AS
W___ORDS. (c. A. T. )
M325
P331
P332
P333
P334
P335
336
P337
P338
P339
WS341
WS342
W5343
W5344
w5345
WS346
WS347
WS348
241
The student will correctly use PERIODS in ABBREVIATIONS.
PENMANSHIP
The student will correctly HQEQ a WRITING INSTRUMENT.
The student will correctly POSITION the PAPER. depending
on left or right handedness and manuscript or cursive
writing.
The student will correctly FORM upper and lower case
manuscript and cursive LETTERS (beginning second semester).
The student will MATCH UPPER WITH LOWER CASE letters in
manuscript and cursive writing.
The student will use correct SIZE in manuscript or cursive
writing.
The student will correctly SPACE manuscript and cursive
LETTERS when writing words. sentences. and paragraphs.
The student will write NEATLY and LEGIBLY.
The student will correctly use MARGINS. HEADINGS. and
INDENTATIONS.
The student will use correct SLANT and will JOIN letters
correctly in cursive writing.
WORD STUDY
The student will recognize RHYMING WORDS and ALLITERATIONS.
The student will recognize CONTRACTIONS in context and
identify the words from which the contractions are made.
(C.A.T.) (See Reading WI-3lO.)
The student will use common ABBREVIATIONS.
The student will identify a COMPOUND WORD by recognizing
the component words.
The student will match words with their SYNONYMS. (C.A.T./
MEAP) (See Reading C-3l3.l.)
The student will match words with their ANTONYMS. (C.A.T./
MEAP) (See Reading C-3l3.2.)
The student will choose the appropriate HOMONYM - same
sound. may have same spelling. differ in meaning (peer -
to look searchingly. OR peer - a person with equal
standing. OR pier - a dock.)
The student will select an appropriate item to complete
an ANALOGY and state the relationship. (MEAP) (See
Reading C-310.)
242!
WS349 The student will be able to divide an AFPIXED WORD into
a BASE WORD and its PREFIX and/or SUFFIX 1C C.A T. —/MEAP)
(See Reading Wl- 305. )
WS3SO.l The student will use the dictionary to divide words into
SYLLABLES. (C.A.T.)
WS3SO.2 The student will match WORDS with their most APPROPRIATE
MEANINGS. (C.A.T./MEAP) (See Reading C3l2.)
W5350.3 The student will use the dictionary to increase VOCAEULARY.
REFERENCE AND STUDY SKILLS
RS36l The student will arrange words in ALPHABETICAL ORDER
through the third letter. (MEAP) (See Reading RS301.)
Dictionary:
RS362.l The student will correctly use the DICTIONARY.
R8362.2 The student will match WORDS with their most appropriate
DEFINITIONS. (C.A.T./MEAP) (See Reading C312.)
RS362.3 The student will be introduced to GUIDE WORDS.
Parts of a Book:
R8363 The student will correctly USE TABL Eof CONTENTS TITLE
PAGE and GLOSSARY. (MEAP) (See Reading 302.5
Reference Sources:
RS364 The student will correctly choose and use reference
sources: ATLAS. DICTIONARY ENCYCLOPEDIA. and MAPS.
(C.A.T ./MEAP) (See Reading R5203. )
Study Skills:
RS365.l The student will maintain a PHYSICAL §TUDY ENVIRONMENT
that is condusive to learning: adequate lighting and
ventilation. good posture. appropriate space and materials.
and minimal distractions.
RS365.2 The student will maintain an ATTITUDINAL STUDY ENVIRONMENT
that is condusive to learning: following directions.
developing independent work and thinking habits. developing
questioning techniques. staying on and completing tasks.
and developing self-motivation.
RS365.3 The student will PROOFREAD all work.
LITERATURE APPRECIATION
LA37l.l The student will be exposed to a VARIETY of LITERATURE
by being READ 29 daily by teacher.
£243
LA371.2 The student will be exposed to a VARIETY of LITERATURE
LA372
LA373
LA374
LA375
LA376
C381
C382
C383
C384.l
C384.2
C385
C386
by READING self-chosen materials daily (such as USSR:
undisturbed sustained silent reading).
The student will tell if a selection is FANTASY or
REALISM, FICTION or NON-FICTION. (C.A.T.) (See Reading
The student will identify the FEELINGS and EMOTIONS of
CHARACTER. (C.A.T./MEAP) (See Reading L-304.)
The student will identify the SETTING (where and when)
of a selection. (C.A.T./MEAP) (See Reading L-304.)
The student will indicate the AUTHOR'S PURPOSE in a given
selection. (MEAP) (See Reading C-3ll.
The student will derive meaning from FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE.
(C.A.T.)
COMPOSITION
The student will practice PRE-WRITING SKILLS by: choosing
and narrowing a topic: gathering information. both fact
and opinion: taking notes: expanding the vocabulary to
include descriptive. sensory. appropriate words: and
writing a rough draft.
The student will WRIT; ORIGINA_L summers: telling.
questioning. and exclaiming.
The student will CONSTRUCT PARAGRAPHS using: topic
sentence. supporting sentences. sentence sequence. and
transitional words.
The student will WRITE ORIGINAL SELECTIONS: stories and
poems.
The student will be introduced to the ELEMENTS Q: A
STORY: setting. plot. and character analysis.
The student will use the CORRECT FORM in writing:
invitations. thank you notes, friendly and business
letters. addressing envelopes. and book reports.
The student will be introduced to TECHNIQUES g; PROOFREADING:
content. sentence structure. grammar and usage. spelling.
mechanics. and revision.
244
;§P Philoso h Statement
Our basic premise maintains that in the ffinal analysis, the
role of a school system is to serve the welfare of students and that
all decisions regarding program organization, staffing and
facilities must ultimately be decided in terms of the contributions
these decisions make to the teaching/learning process. We believe
all children can learn and therefore we expect the best from both
teachers and learners and will be satisfied with nothing less. In
light of this, the professional staff is committed to responsible
management of the critical variables which have been found to
contribute significantly to the creation and maintenance of
effective schools.
245
§§E grjtical Variables
l. Maintain a teaching staff which holds high expectations for
students.
2. Maintain a staff of principals which holds high expecta-
tions for students and teachers and which sees its primary role as
being instructional leaders at the building level.
3. Encourage a structured approach to classroom teaching where
clear, specific goals and objectives are systematically planned for
and pursued.
4. Support teaching which incorporates ongoing monitoring of
student learning behavior and provides periodic feedback to
students.
5. Support teaching behaviors which increase the amount of
time on task.
6. Persist in implementing fair and firm discipline procedures
for students through the implementation of the Assertive Discipline
Program.
7. Encourage 'the lappropriate use of' positive reinforcement
with students.
8. Maintain a staff of principals that emphasizes the monitor-
ing of teacher instructional behavior and provides feedback to
teachers regarding their technique.
9. Encourage all professional staff in the use of assessment,
evaluative data and procedures.
246
10. Emphasize a sound program of staff development by continu-
ing to focus on the implementation of the Instructional Theory Into
Practice (ITIP).
ll. Continue to emphasize the maintenance of clean and orderly
school buildings.
Definition of an Effective School
The Effective School:
*Maintains high expectations for staff and students.
*Establishes a well-disciplined, secure and wholesome learning
environment.
*Teaches to clear, specific goals and objectives with attendant
plans to achieve them.
*Monitors and evaluates pupil, teacher, and administrative
staff performances on a regular basis.
*Utilizes a continuous staff training model that supports
building annual program plans.
*Maintains clean and orderly school buildings.
*Improves student achievement in the basic skills.
To
CHAPTER 1
ARTICLE 3
Parents
School District of the City of '
248
Purpose of Chapter I
The purpose of Chapter l/Article 3 is to provide
additional services in reading and/or math for
designated students. Children enrolled in
Chapter I/Article 3 programs in reading and/or
math are to CONTINUE TO RECEIVE THE
SAME AMOUNT OF INSTRUCTIONAL TIME
EACH DAY IN READING AND/OR MATH WITH
THE CLASSROOM TEACHER AS STUDENTS
WHO ARE NOT ENROLLED IN CHAPTER I/
ARTICLE 3 PROGRAMS. In addition to class-
room instruction, Chapter I/Article 3 students are
to receive extra help in reading and/or math
through the Chapter I/Article 3 programs.
Board of Education
Non-Discriminatory Policy
It is the policy of the Board of Education and the School
District not to unlawfully discriminate on the basis of
handicap, race, rtligion, national origin, sex, age, marital
status, height, or weight. The District reaffirms its policy to
comply with Title VI and VII of the Civil Rights Act of
l 964, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972,
Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, the Elliott-
Larsen Civil Rights Act, the Michigan Handicappers'
Civil Rights Act, and all other applicable Federal and
State laws and regulation prohibiting discrimination. ,
249
The Academic Achievement Program is a pull-
out program which regularly takes designated
students, grades two-six (2-6), out of their class-
rooms to provide them with intensive instruction
in reading and/or mathematics in small group
settings. The A2 program is funded by both the
Federal Education Consolidation and Improve-
ment Act (ECIA) Chapter I, and Article 3 of the
State School Aid Act.
Pupil Selection:
Article 3 eligibility is determined by academic
need. Chapter I eligibility is determined by
academic need and attendance area. The
children are selected to work in the program
based upon the judgment of the teachers and the
California Achievement Test (C.A.T.) scores.
GOALS of the Program
1.
WM
A
Provide intensive academic instruction to the
educationally disadvantaged,
. Involve parents in the program,
. Supply students with incentives for academic
improvement,
. Operate staff inservice programs,
. Measure academic growth, and
. Prepare students to effectively meet the
academic competition of the general
classroom.
250
Evaluation:
The progress of the children will be observed
daily by the classroom teacher. The California
Achievement Test is used as a pretest and a post-
test for students in A2 Programs. Measure-
ment of achievement in reading and math is
based on the gain shown from spring to spring
scores on the reading and math subtests.
A2 Programs provide instruction in READING
and MATH in addition to the instruction provided
by the classroom teacher.
For more information or an appointment to
observe this A2 instruction program, call:
Your child's Chapter I/Article 3 teacher
S—chool Telephone number
251
Your child
is in the Academic Achievement Program for
Reading and/or Math at . .T - School.
A2 Is For Parents, Too
Parents are a child's first teacher. A2 offers
parents opportunities to continue learning and
expanding parenting skills through parent
meetings and school activities.
Please check when you would be available to
attend A2 meetings/workshops for parents.
Mon. Tue. Wed. Thur. Fri.“
Mornings
Afternoons
In order that we will know that you have
received the A2 Program information, please
sign the “tear off" section and return.
(Parent’s Signature)
Telephone number where you can be reached
APPENDIX E
DIAGRAMS OF CLASSROOMS
252
.e noses a
N N .
no.3 0 out
omeuoum m. 60%.
adnesm n
u u x
N x
l . S
. m.
seem . n
x N . .u
. nou< wax _
. m
. w.
n m . m
1.d m. . m.
1. 3.00 TIIIIIIIIIIB
3303 a u. s h.
3 n .
8.}
1 .u
N N
a. x x
B
8
a
T.
Zoom wdqm
mxoon —
N N
_ sound: _ cause I x _ 30cc“:—
Zoox zuam0. _ OT
274
STUDENT 5
SECOND GRADE:
XmWC
NmsC:NH (agnzyo
UU®+:.
C00 mC;
Il'n OI I!
C..._ ...NEC
X03
\ .N 3; .OC ,
.Csm ..C-y
aid
‘uulllf' NI .Illl .Nl NI.
E: P
we; on «u_2i:&C
cUCC: f. +3Cn
I all: ...-‘l! .u .‘I
TC CCU QC..- FOTUR
QQHNC . ..Ctij
-wa n:- .. Cg
(UFCB ®3C
. II .T.!- Ioi 0'" TON... Elli: III 'nlll‘l'lul '0
275
STUDENT 5
SECOND GRADE:
C
III II...
,.
fr.
.r
I'll - ll]! III III... I .. II I" I. II I... ‘2' ' I. III... ‘. III.-O. ‘5'": il‘.
I o
'u I fill. .6. 1"... ."I I l! lIII ' - a ti
' I. |
\
I ' cl .Illl II. ' 0" v. II
I! .lo
I I. 'II' III! - 'cll. 'Dlllllll‘! - '1 I
II T
D I'D": 'l I' I T I 'TI'IIIIII
II
II I. 1" ‘ ' III. .II I. IITIII 'l I II 'IC‘)‘ all: I '1 It I I.
276
STUDENT 5
SECOND GRADE:
m C
5‘1.‘
EC 35E .5 CC; C..
0 ’l! I. I0! 1.....- ll
1:0 .xsscw Ceca C390?
..ijme ((3% CECF C: “CH
g5 .....C 6.50
277
STUDENT 5
SECOND GRADE:
fi5CCCNCL\ -.\_...;.- \CCCQ
.TNCDKC . QC.
CQOCCCm- CC
(MCCrCfi CSKC U: r...
I'.
III'OIIII
WOQCC
‘l
C
CJLC
O ...--- ' .I... I. I
CoopCHw E
I- I.- I I
CSOFC VQCAL SUC}. -IH
3.3 ..C....
C35 7C .. C 333A
.I'.I.|.I I--. I
to"!!! II
278
(CmC E333. {.3330 E33332.
ENC 0+3.--..-.C.33CE3+3C3m
333< 3C3N- 3:3N 3:3: CCQ/fl
£336.: \ACwfluma-MC \CU3C3N
SECOND GRADE: STUDENT 5
I
x3C3C3t-3m 311C
3.3332? 333 333.33.
333.3% 33333:--. .5393
C ..C... ..C-Q \A‘oA—U
279
.. -... ,. La..- m L Etom .w .,._ n
1 LONELDL LASLOSLLNE
LQLLLBLL. L395: Nchsm
Al ..
N N . / LAVA >.>\<._/ >
LN L: mm. LE 5. NG; QQL Mm
.L :4 L, LLL LL... N --LH , ..L
LLwL 43......“ www .‘NL ‘ . V J gm— O <
\ SECOND GRADE: STUDENT 5
...JNJAJ.“1‘JA.-
J. vju UK My
. w.
280
SECOND GRADE: STUDENT 5 '
ELL £®C
\CLLQZQN CCbJTLZOk.
w\/\ “33%
LEE L£®Lw
Lsox LLLLL
ML LbQQLJO
53
L.
355 ELLLCE.
ELLELLL _ Sfiém
-..... -.CMLLL L Li
CL> LT 63.
:33 X3 MUN/i
43 OVEN LEO. OLMN
OWL
281
ZLQ/LC/Z JO///CVC;/Cu .
1 _Z/.7/)c/..‘ ear '
éL/LLUUTEf EEV
282
SECOND GRADE: -STUDENT 6
xx:
8
Sq
283
SECOND GRADE: STUDENT 6
QxD \NU
RNU b..\NR NRQmW .2: N3 RKD ---..UDKU
_- \ ED mwNRUUmiDQO
R\02\w\ D, K0 txqv DAD-0w: BL
QQDRNDD D WV \0 3%}
my... . R»... x x: .mwKWCN
{III-u! ...-..." C'Ily ...I .-.o!
..-...D .. ...-Nam
...N CD ..Km...
K .... D, \Rqé...-.m§\.\u ....-. ..
w. ....J\\ U.\\.\ \S . m\n..U\p\ NUR . .Q% Q«
o \Qm.\n.w \xw\.\ .R\\SQ XR\DKV\ . . Rx:
.U..1\-..,,-,\. . .\\.3_ TM. .\4- / K N . .
, . NM»...- nwm 0-7.0-- .-.-l.-- - .13..
4
8
2
285
SECOND GRADE: STUDENT 6
\... V\L\\p\ QRR
m\.U-V\h\m-\ I...-
. m\-wn.w\\<\ --.-....
QDW\.(\\.V.\: m-R
U3 U \5 DR
RN .-
83.. Dex DQ
\VRLWN
DNRM
-.-(RRQQ RN..-
...--..UDRVRR. m
-.--.-- .... QEQR m
.- : ..MVQ. R
.. \\RR\U RRNQQ QU .Q\
...-“KR
286
I . Enl- I-..
- RUAU\\\IIU.-Idqu KQMOQQACRI
DEM-WY \\D-
UR\\.-v . . . NU\
\QVY \NRUK DEV
\Dka RD D .NRWN
\3
N. N. .C. , ...... ...DRN
.RwDQ-Q‘
.\-n\..W.V.-
MD NAN-Um
287
STUDENT 6
SECONDUGRADE:
' 'II I. "
ll- l on. I II- ' .‘I i
\. x...\n\vJ
U\\\U\\C\U I\
U .U. .....\\\
I D IllltlltOI I.v.?».. -l U! I ..III‘. 1"“.
U V\ \ UUKW R3,-..
- (U \U . Uxe m
\NUK U 3U \U KU.--
\\\4U:- -..UgrU \UUUOBVNr
.. ....W. \J 1\ \\
288
- Q UUUUUUU QQQ...Q.... QQI. -..-QIEUQ -.UUUUU-UUU
UUQnU ...-U. Q: 3...on UmU-UUUUU Q. UUQQQ ..QUUQ
USN .UU GQQ UU UU...QUh. QUU 3Q: *
IQ 2U Fri}.
..UUUUQU ....UURU-UUQUh UUUU QUUUQUW MU GI UIsI.
UIUUAUUQ UU GCUIQUU -m... AQI QUQ QU
STUDENT 7
THIRD GRADE:
QUUU-UI-G UUQ Q. QQUU UEQW MQLUUUG Ur; ..
GUI-U UUI GQQ mQUU mU. UUUG QC; Q...
.. i.\.!.~é.ll . IiiiQQflGMIIIrWH'Qdan—lusii Ii-
289
U
STUDENT 7
o!
: U. QQUU..--\U--U§UUUQUQUQ\UU- ..UUUUQUU. QUQG .QUUQ
THIRD GRADE:
$330.2. ......UUU-om-Ug- s..- .. Us...
..UWNUQIU .U-U - UIUUUUIUUUUWUU 8H 3... U. 6Q... _
I'!
290
£03 «WW: th§ 3... .-....BS $.00? .00: -00.. Q .Q Q .0
box (.FEQU .......\. MQQQQQQQQ - mQEQQ ..QQ
$400.5...qu m: vaybe .3. . ...OLQCQN m Mm <06 .m
mnwwmxfi Q . \CLQQQQn .Q\ MWWPQLQN 0 .- .. 0.wa ......
.....\
...... --wAQQQQQ MQQQfm :4 QQQQMQQF ES.
_ ....._-.-..I....-.: Q06 QQQNU... 1%? MQQQ\\QW._,
-...uwQQQ QQQQQ. w fig 823%.
NQQ .Qm +000 . . .. 0039\00 4
O I
I. or . . :7! .Il
. .
. .
- o¢.' ..II ......
291
.IJN-UQQQ L Q+Cm >5 4+0-
0:00-wa-
...-HO; UQ U-..- U4 QwNQ-QIQWQ-QQUOE fifth >T 5m
.QQQn-w 30 0.0-: :05
7
0 .0 5:04 S $2;ch
...-W13-.. ...-1%: fiQUQéflI-fij
L00: 4.1000- QQQ QQQQQ-IMwM-QQAQQ.
mQ-QQ Q §000
\QQQQ Qm. QEQ «03:40an- ,. .. -
. \
292
‘THdRD GRADEzi STUDENT
QQUQQQQS M
[Vlloll
Q.\
--mQQ QmQ 9..----438 QquQQim
_ .QQMQQQ .m .QQQQQ-
-W®:\4i1 ....
.. .---.....- :.- --.-..:..-. ...- :35... :i. .GML id‘lim
E... H: WAT-.1.
QQQQQ , ...-Q
2293
THIRD GRADE:
2 STUDENT 7
t. ...“.."tt .I'l .ulli ..
,I,!.‘ .I -. I. A- it
II': ' 'l.b
. .. Nmfifiwfixw. Q.
mfifiaw.
294
THIRD GRADE“: STUDENT 7
I ..l: .--..II'I'.‘
lemh $051 awn?” Q Q >QQDI .Kw ..
0+ Q\Q\: «..wa
mw:feE®41kO£ 4
\ ......QQ Q “Q ....Q m5. .
..\I . .\. Q .\Q (Kw.
W301. _
£33.»-
295
III lulll 'llll.-. .
.... m .. - .‘ ”PTO 0% E
STUDENT 7
THIRD GRADE:
. II‘I.
-- --..-I.--...,..WQHU---QJ Q ‘ .
Q1: Q C
GQUQOQ 0%.... ..1 \u
@Q Q... d _ Em
Itlail‘. OIIIu‘I‘ u!‘ III'.
..II'. . III." "'l||1'- Iv.
|:I.' . . .. ,ntll-Ju- l..¢l-l ul ..Ilu."
296
NFC .. \Qx-C
-:!:::alM1Jii$2?.i.
. Q- _ As:
- 1-46...- .\..CC
STUDENTE7
THLRD GRADE:
QQHQ
’
3..-: QE . \E NE
A... Q- _ . -1Q....Q.Q......... .. ...-C-
....Q-Q--.Q...
It‘l.|
Q31}-.- Wm? 9b \QH --.
1.-.. ..QQ-E ----
297
’
1"
li I'll
.xQU -- U0.
VU‘
... \. .Q ... Q. N \
...-...? ..QU, \QU
}
.3-)
-...QU -...- ..NUU..-»
: :STUDENT Z
.\ . .
\ .5
\-
\J
QQU VU --...!i\Q.......-
Q Q... . .-U
Q0 Q. Q.
QQU- 3U . Q U... .....-
\wU-iHQMQH-U -\Q U.---
QU- - G:
298
., . __ _ . UEQ UQQQQ EUQQQQ
,-...Q,.-.3-.. ...... .3 QU 5Q- ...Q ...-Q
-.Q-UUQUWUQQQQUQ: U: UNVQQQ . QUQ .1. 311
QQQQ-QQ QQQQU E .UQQQUU LUQNUQAQ
7
STUD:
QQQU.-..®.Q...-,.Q-CQ.-.,Q.OQQQQ swag: ED U U:
THIRD GRADEzé
WQ, Q-.. U U QUEUQ -.U:.IC.QIIWQC1©U
\\-
$-me .... U2... U-QQ...Q: UQQE FUEUEHW .-
I)
.Q .Q-EU- ...-.... .....HQ- ,- .
299
STUDENT 8
THIRD GRADE:
.. ...... ...J. ...6 EU.
QJE .JJ - UQJQ H -.Cowa/6MW
...... Q3 Q7 Q L6JJ62J >>..z-m£d.....6 6666
3 666 6.6. 56.6 UJJWJ: J66 3666
_JZJ J JBJ JJJUNQxQ 74.56% J60 Q6--.J6L
Q. JJ6_ / 96/ JJfl. 76% 6.6; KM
! J J.J J. .5 J.
300
STUDEN'T 8
THIRD ehAoE:
.. .W W . ... . W, v/
u I t a, ‘
W
-MWJWEI: WWW WWWWW m... ._ . .
.o. |.l..- ..IC‘. lit-III! .Illo] zd‘o‘
I / ’0. u
....W.....H.W.3 -T....W T.--............-..fi WW. W3.-. _
; . In.-.
1W ..--
II-- ..{cll .II' i‘%.. .l ...... l.‘ ’fi'll. ...»
CO . W
.../{V n ....l ......u- . ... .--!fioivl
6W.
W W
.-.W....W .WQWQ
1...]...1"
301
'0
.. N-.. i... w. - ...-u E . . : \. -- W .- -..- - -....-W- .-.. f . -.W \ -.....
\ 2--.. .\ .-.- 3L. . r6 2._ _ \ ..- .
. . - 2. W. \
STUDENT; 8
., THIRD skim;-
- ‘
\
u
r 0’ o .
.... .u v.0... 3?} o - . ..l.16.q-LI-a.|....i 'U. - 1'. ..I ll.-. 1 a. A II‘. II .....I -4 . .l'lirc ....|. a . .. - . . .
. . _ . .
W v . . x W . .W ..
a . . .
. . ’ . . o . .2
.I.’ .. 0.... Ill .. a . l in. .'l|l 'l: I ...v. v . u . n . .. l. . .f . II. n u o ... . . 0.. I. I.‘
. . a . o .. . . . .
c . . o . . o . . .
' a . I .. I . . . . .
‘ . 4"] III..- . .o {I I -. ... .0 II .II I I r . o. I I o 3.0 . II I. , . . ‘.l . II I o.
‘
v - I n . I - O 1
Ill‘. l“ - W ‘
O C . Q t
I I -
302
-.--.-..>>o/w oWW -.chWWWQW Di. :2- ....
1"... .III .
W57
‘-
UJDWQ u w C/ Z/O/y
7 V
I Q ..'
-- 3.2m --
W
. W. O
.. .-WWW._WW..WW
ZW, OW U ..
...... - Z/ 0W0 WW :8 P
m- ---}! UPC?) fixatx/
m 4MWUQW dfifi ...O WAG.
W ... .../Cam... WuQu% Qflom m... .-----I-..!.
303
THIRD GRADE‘: STUDENT 8
I,‘ .III'II
Eat/w U(/* uwrmj +yifl ..-:
..I->>O/U UC/X UUW 0/, CO V CCU
. A - 757-..... 2..
-. .3... ...... ...? 5...
I'll il..u.|'.l ‘00
26,/w .OX 3.0/7 umodu v@
07
.©/. .../.0... by? C... -. . CO U
304
STUDENI 8
- E:
THIRD GRAD
I ..t..|.!
..!:;. .... MI
III. \I
.1}! Qllllv lelltl‘t‘e III.‘ ~ .' .. Q.’ 7 ‘ It... ‘ N
. ll‘rxlll.‘ ti.‘ III! '1
Q n. , I . , . - loll. ‘J»'!‘ I: -I' . a O I-.ll|.|' lo‘. §-‘ I'l".|!-l v-'||z"‘l' ll|c..ll II. vlll.'lll.ll I-
. . .. . \ . ‘ .
. . a . \ V . \ § \
\ . . . . c . \ n a
0 . .s u s .. H \ s .. a . .
I' '. a. . ,‘lv, :0 ‘0 . ¥.\ . K . ‘ Iv. .. . . ' ' 1
w
- . , .
305
NIH WWW mfiU -WMU;,-A%U:EW0¥ :3LM%V.iAJU O
b b - ...,.,., bi bub --b b
\AV\.
-- \O--- . 0.0 \C. .0- _ . . C -..i--...J.......-..U..
STUDENT 8
:- .3 v--:é. .-:.u-- --.. :-z:2iw»:1i:iJ\-1 .333 . .2w
3- . ., . . . m_ . w \MHV \ \#mfl
..
. _ .
u . .
E ‘0 I . .\.\... v a II ..lpt Ill . '0 t n. ...l‘..“... I. ua“. ‘0‘.) 'dl'lli ll.- ‘IIIID 'n‘trl V’I'I‘II' I'll-l..- I....)Ill|.l|'l "-n|ll| I: l . -.. I CC‘ .0 . "l. I. II.
D .\ 3 c. .u . \ o\ O\
A . o . x o n u
R I . l ... IK /\ .
G . c. c
D ,. .
R I
I
m '0 ‘1‘ II. ' I. Itll |\Il.| .II.V.-. .....!.II n.-. 01..
: 3.. 3 3o 53...-.. .3 .- .0.
306
#5 0.00 -----....fikzv 0.5% :. -..-....-.- 6U 4C UHU. --F..i
4. Ufl-/_.\. jfixO .3. F37) 7CO
C3 :0 PEEHPrQT.IfiFr%
A
I J
' .-
I
"1
-\.3
U
STQEENT 8
OJ
‘,:
i
(«:1
,1..—
:fiz
”’23
4
r r
a
“i
*7
3.1
f I
3.4.33.3. U, .-, :w.-.-313-30m.33 . 1w.
. . .. ..- . . - - .44@ ......3-3..... 33% I...
\u’
,THIRD GRADE:
<25
\
. ... )..--._,..3..--3-~...--.--...-- j....n..-.!i I.
FC- - .\ _ . 3 3
307
GRADE:
THIRD
STUDENT 8
...-u .7 .7. 3J-
.‘ Iv, Ila ..- II ‘1 I VII
In I 'I - I.
III. I II I»
I Ut- II- .-.III lll‘.O-I
-I .II t 1“. tan .- li’.-. I III. I'II'II IT olcu.-lllllvl '.
- I II
I. I iv ' ‘0 . ’I-.:-- II! '9 . lu’t....I|IlIII‘II‘III'-O ‘ u.l|-lll|.1 lo'ul 'I-l' ‘TI'..I|II|II¢ .'
Iv
ill IT ' I... (ll .llu. ‘ -Illv..l'Tpo|l'I-I|-ollqn‘lulnl|.'
IO.
... ..,.....-._.-.3. w .93.-.- --V..../m0 .. .0
308
THIRD GRADE. STUDENT 9
(THIRD/FOURTH COMB NATION)
“5 ‘ _-. ff“
. --x\\.-_Xm..-M\sLWi m H
1.120
--._-—~ -—..--—~_—- --—— — ..-——
_-_\k,_\\e.\3\ VGA" “WC;
Afar:
rAYIN sist ex :We 3“”
é. a we wry”: 9i
/ ZWM
/ ’/ a/r.
J75!
313
THIRD GRADE: STUDENT 9
(TH l RD/ FOURTH COMBINATION)
tences makeup a title for year paragraph.
. . Jan..." .,
-,‘--
'“ You are the Int-then...” ’
WW5 -..- "‘
H 221%“ saga; you teachz 4 1;“ I .- V - ..
. ,QI‘Ib manigtudents are in your classgfv’ -_ .5. .
,«flwfiutkhflme-WOIMO ..vpu sits... H,..-H HH.,_
DO ybu allow students to choose _where _to sit’.‘
‘ywhathappeos when a' student breaks this rule'2:
Which subject is your favorite to teach?
m cation... vvme a LUIIIIJlUlt: scams. w; .u allav ct use” qUUthLII Ali-Cl writing all
Copyright? Frenig sauna . ‘ 4
‘ “€94 Lamina To Write Paragraphs
314
THIRD GRADE: STUDENT lO
(THIRD/FOURTH COMBINATION)
\'
‘ .. o . ... . -.+fl-H:. ... '3 \\ \
_—‘_" ‘ . . - -— ‘ . . -..... - —— _: :- ‘- -—--_-
.IMsv ‘9.th- 7. 15-3.; .- H _ .. ”“4 ”*W,} _, .... ..3. . , ..- -.. ' .,. .. -33.... .;
-- ,~ , _ ...- , , .- ~ . ’ mm.-. a we. -. .. r “*-“.f!.!‘
. - n c ‘ - .J' " . .- ---‘ - " ' >
- ’ ‘- -‘ -‘ "" - ~ . ‘ _- _--, .-..c- - - E 2..
. n - 1 W. . . . .. o n.’ 0 " I‘ ‘ ’ fl ‘ ‘1‘; - — 0—, .
“Z-‘P'W- 2'. 4 - — ‘7
born —
~ - Led-F'Wr; ‘;;;¥L;§~;»,..‘~3 AMI:
p
----— - -- _ __ _.__ - ' ' .4 r:‘u.£-- - .. ?
WQJ —WQ5__$UJ'OIQS Itd - _
v- ’13:] 2" C thI+ I)
._~'__ —. —-—-—.——--
315
THIRD GRADE: STUDENT 10
. '- T R FOURTH M NATION ' " '
\ V? ( HI 0/ C0 81 ) /0 331$?
a
...ag‘. "mu. .-.—....
316
__ ,,-_,‘,9 1H9 ‘1'“ THIRD GRADE. STUDENT TO . 9 ..
-, ‘. (THIRD/FOURTH COMBINATION) ma" F“::;:.s: ..z.
\‘ \ ‘9‘: ‘ . 1:5: 1': I '-3°"~‘9 9 axl‘2h
Sandy kno we what she ‘Nc :91: 9 1‘.) 99299., but 9.999..» l'9.'+:s trouble saying
lt. She often forgets to write 19‘ ccmpiete sentences How do you
know '11 something 1s a- 9.99.99.99.29. or a fragment‘ipart 91 8.--... - ‘
sentence)? You must ask, “Doest 1:993 make sense?" For example
“.Ihe door.” is not a sentence but “The door 01939391 99991111 a loud
’- bang. ” is a sentence. H611? Sandy learn about sentences. Lock at
the sentences below. Or‘. the 11.“- 9 next to each cr9e9r,.:r1te S_ If it is a
. sentence. W911e NS if it is not :9 sc.n.enc.s.
. v ‘
1. The 31:99 was greV. 0199.99199', 3.99:1: gs!9.90:.,.
Q §3udder9M9 the r3999
sat 19981393, 100. 9mg“ 1 1.1.9.9 set: :7.
®l owlec.’ 9.9;) witha :3: 2993.1 ‘5 s
5 80", was .’ glMl 99:."'1 2:99.13
(5;) Mom Cal: 959: “EM/1119:: 19.2"»: 1:: 1:99—22.“
GIL; 937137919" 33).! . IIU'Q' 199'": J " 131 it")?
8. l helpec- 1.919.999. fete ‘9 .=. 99.92.9719 5 0‘91"
5 When l 99:29:: don: l started to.
@sMom 5319:? 519:9. yes really.
Rewrite NE: sentence to 999:9. 1:93 11.; .99: complete sentences.
.9 ¥_tbL..ch._e_s.9_a:/;al.mzstm
...;_.d. _arLQLJJmcLflfilqy _
@x...
:9 _
‘ - . o
.._,_ ......
h *‘J
*Bs‘ainwcrkl erte a story 99.199399199999392. you: 21.1.19: 9‘ w19én 11 92999999..
Wank 999mm: 999 99 9 9 9 9"
. D Cchun. , ..9-.._ 4 3455') 5.91:; 19 .9 .‘.'.'91 a:
317
19914993 3592199955 STUDENT 10
(Tum/FQURTH COMBINATION)
‘ 9- «xi»; ....‘... urn-J. I...
—
". ... a _ I
.:.--- I" "- 9 ~."""~ w. 45...». '-. ”'5 P’Lt'... ‘
L) Q. Q‘ - A
as. -- 4.. 9
T 9.099 3.9947. 139-4'99
.-l.‘_%:e. s_g.__8._r_c.?¢__$_11flL-.gn___y% .- _£ Q.Lc_._.______-
_flLw—iulay _-_j'_©__m_a_LL_ ..1'199 f. 1 9999 14(9-
Ib--t— -%.19_c..1‘<_ '98 .-JFun 19o -9/‘95'31‘-
‘ ._ — —— - -. .— —
_. _ .-——9—-— ——->¢..~ ~_—_.—— .——- - - __...
_-
_ _._..... .._ _—
..
-
.-
3 -_-— ~
-
-'_ _ - __.__—..___
~ -
‘ ...—-—--'
.
... .
. .977
.219... .
' -.
“1:
" .
_—__... g _ - -
)1...
-
— — _ -_----—- 0- —-
.—
318
THIRD GRADE: STUDENT 10
(THIRD/FOURTH COMBINATION)
.. Q . 3‘ C“ ‘0}
n b‘ .—'-.T
\qy_--.bec a u s ....o £51:me rag/A
‘--- - —’ .-—. .~.~00--’ -... .. . —----
. — v .-.§—.-- - - -- --.-_o- c.- - a
77’) 5 ”7 0:1 \ COW}: \ 01""
beco- ”3;. 04? OH “Hat.
mm, . ‘_(
“...-n- .~-0—I-0¢.— ...- -.
163/’8! «OZ/,0 vz/flx-..2/2€,
. ..C 3" :0" '
‘._. - Q- 2*
T“ V ’ ‘ " "3'2 “a“ n:. ‘.' _.
o —--.- ...—0-0-n-h - - A. ~- ...—...-
—
' I
. _ _- ‘0 2'.
. .
_w A .
‘ i.fi - .. - "7".
I- - .
; U 1 ,fi‘:- Ob
o-w*O-o— flfl-n-. 0.0 -fl—-.- .rfi
-- E .0.»- ”k..-“ ~—
-0
. . - .
m‘ag'vr- . rgaéww- L_b '.
”in our»: “rm‘f‘igzsg‘. ‘
I
.
a -9.
--m . . . . _ “...—.....- ‘ _- —1--.’-—-. 0.. - O- ...-..- - ...--
v
APPENDIX G
CLASSROOM VISITATION CALENDAR
319
Monday Thesday Hednesday Thursday Friday
1 2
Preliminary Preparation
File boxes Holmes--Pick
Writing folders up parental
Distribution of consent formSI
parental con-
sent forms
5 6 7 8 9
Kindergarten First Second Third Third/fourth
9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m.
12 13 14 15 16
Third/fourth Second Third
9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m.
Kindergarten First
12:30 p.m. 12:30 p.m.
19 20 21 22 23
Third Third/fourth Kindergarten First Second
9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m.
26 27 28 29 30
Second Third Third/fourth
9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m. 9:00 a.m.
First Kindergarten
12:30 p.m.
12:30 p.m.
APPENDIX H
CHECKLIST OF THE FIFTEEN FACTORS ASSOCIATED WITH
EFFECTIVE WRITING INSTRUCTION
(FARR & DANIELS, 1986)
320
KEY FACTORS ASSOCIATED WITH EFFECTIVE WRITING INSTRUCTION
CLASSROOM VISITATIONS
1.
Teachers who understand and appreciate the basic lin-
guistic competence that students bring with them to
school, and who therefore have positive expectations
for students' achievements in writing.
Regular and substantial practice in writing, aimed at
developing fluency.
The opportunity to write for real, personally signifi-
cant purposes.
Experience in writing for a wide range of audiences,
both inside and outside of school.
Rich and continuous reading experience, including
both published literatureof acknowledged merit and
the work of peers and instructors.
Exposure to models of writing in process and writers
at work, including both teachers and classmates.
Instruction in the processes of writing; that is,
learning to work at a given writing task in approp-
riate phases, including prewriting, drafting, and
revising.
Collaborative activities for students that provide
ideas for writing and guidance for revising works
in progress.
One-to-one writing conferences with the teacher.
Direct instructions in specific strategies and
techniques for writing.
ll.
Reduced instruction in grammatical terminology and
related drills, with increased use of sentence
combining activities.
l2.
Teaching of writing mechanics and grammar in the
context of students' actual compositions, rather than
in separate drills or exercises.
13.
Moderate marking of surface structure errors, focus-
ing on sets or patterns of related errors.
I“.
Flexible and cumulative evaluation of student writ-
ing that stresses revision and is sensitive to vari-
ations in subject, audience, and purpose.
l5.
Practicing and using writing as a tool of learning
in all subjects in the curriculum, not just in
English.
APPENDIX I
SUBJECT SCHEDULE
321
Subject Schedule
Time Teacher A Teacher B Teacher C Teacher D Teacher E
(Kinder.) (Grade l) (Grade 2) (Grade 3) (Grade 3/4)
9:00 Math Spelling Reading Reading Language
9:15 Math Handwriting Reading Reading Language
9:30 Gross Reading Reading Reading Language
Motor
9:45 Gross Reading Reading Reading Language
Motor
l0:00 Group Break Break Break Reading
l0:l5 Centers Reading Language Language Reading
l0:30 Centers Reading Language Language Reading
10:45 Centers Reading Language Language Reading
ll:00 Centers Lang./Story Spelling Spelling Spelling
llzlS Music Lang./Story Spelling Spelling Spelling
};:?g- Lunch Lunch Lunch Lunch Lunch
l2:30 Math Science Math Story Story
l2:45 Math Science Math Break Math
l:00 Gross Math Math Math Math
Motor
l:l5 Gross Math Math Math Math
Motor
l:30 Group Math Break Soc. Stud. Science
1:45 Math Science Math Break Math
2:00 Sci./ Science Math Circle Break
Soc. Stud.
322
Time Teacher A Teacher B Teacher C Teacher 0 Teacher E
(Kinder.) (Grade 1) (Grade 2) (Grade 3) (Grade 3/4)
2:15 Sci./ Soc. Stud. math Snack Soc. Stud.
Soc. Stud.
2:30 Review Soc. Stud. Soc. Stud. Music Sharing
2:45 Review Soc. Stud. Soc. Stud. Story Story Time
3:00 Dismissal Dismissal Dismissal Dismissal Dismissal
APPENDIX J
SCHOOL LIBRARY SCHEDULE
323
Elementary School
Library Schedule 1987-1988
Day Grade Time Period
Monday Third 1:00 p m.-1:30 p m
Second 1:30 p m.-2:00 p m
2:00 p m.-2:30 p m
Tuesday 10:30 a.m -10:45 a.m
Kindergarten 11:00 a.m ~11:15 a.m
Third/Fourth 1:30 p.m - 2:00 p.m
Kindergarten 2:00 p.m - 2:15 p.m
Wednesday First 10:30 a.m.-11:00 a.m
12:30 p.m.- 1:00 p.m
1:00 p.m.- 1:30 p.m
1:30 p.m.- 2:00 p.m
2:00 p.m.- 2:30 p.m
Thursday (Library aide works on other activities, such
as computer test scoring.)
Friday (Library open for student research and leisure
reading.)
APPENDIX K
"BATTLE OF THE BOOKS" REPORT FORM
324
BOOK REPORT
NAME
TITLE OF BOOK
AUTHOR
MAIN CHARACTERS:
PLOT:
TELL IN YOUR OWN WORDS WHAT HAPPENED AT THE BEGINNING, THE
MIDDLE, AND THE END OF THE STORY.
USE EXTRA PAPER IF NEEDED.
APPENDIX L
SAMPLE FIELD NOTES FROM RESEARCHER JOURNALS
FIVE PARTICIPATING CLASSROOMS
325
Children divided into three groups: eight children in each group
9:00 a.m.
9:17 a.m.
Sharing time (24 students present): Observation of
electric light/candles. Observation of the letter ”P."
Practice writing a 'P' on the back of pupil in line--
three rows of children with eight in a line. Then they
alternated/turned in the other direction.
Teacher pointed to a picture of a pickle (p). Erica
answered that they had to make a picture of the pickle
and then make a ”p’" on their paper.
P
Materials used were crayons
and a sheet of paper
P P
The teacher circulated around the room, checking each
pupil’s paper.
After teacher checked child’s paper, he/she could then
turn paper over and draw a picture.
Teacher rang bell and announced that the children had
about three more minutes to finish their 'p’s .” The
bell meant "Stop, look, listen."
326
*One book on front chalkboard ledge. Reinbow Brjte and
the Magic Belt.
*Two books on back chalkboard: (1) Christopher Columbus
and (2) e 't 1 Mo h e i e trawb rr
the Big Hungry Bear.
10:08 a.m. Bathroom break.
10:16 a.m. Teacher working with seven pupils who have unfinished
work to p. 28. Other pupils are drawing "c" pictures.
10:38 a.m. Pupils were told not to draw on both sides. Two boys
took out books to read when finished with their
picture.
(1) boy: ginnie the Pooh
(2) boy: The Big Bunny Bogk _
(3) girl: The Cet’e Quiz; r--Dr. Seuss
10:52 a.m. Sharing of completed pictures. Teacher asked one girl
to talk about her picture--”’c’ things."
9:40 a.m.
9:56 a.m.
10:09 a.m.
10:10 a.m.
Child
(boy)--
problem
10:35 a.m.
327
H dn 5 a 0 tobe 7--Sec d
Teacher instructed Group 11 pupils to come to the
reading group area with their reading books and their
workbooks.
Pupils (some) move about quietly in the room as needed.
Pupils returned from working with reading resource
teacher.
Group II children returned to seats as Group I pro-
ceeded to the reading table.
Pre—assigned written work:
Days of the week
Days of the month
The alphabet
Number words: zero through twenty
Reading Group I returned to seats with the assignment
to read Part II of 'the story Little Helf and the
instruction that they should be on p. 13/30 (2) of
their workbooks.
Teacher reminded students that the .....
10:
ll
11
ll
11
11
328
T rs a 0 tob r -- hir de
53 a.m. Comp. ed. pupils returned, and teacher reviewed spell-
ing directions.
*Hriting topic/assignment prescribed by spelling book
section, "Let’s Urite'--p. 29. E
Teacher told students that they did not have to be
turned in--writing as done on back of a previously used
paper taken from pupils’ desks.
:04 a.m. Child (boy ) came to Math Center. Researcher
asked to see his paper.
:06 a.m. was told to return to his seat.
:08 a.m. Researcher asked teacher if this work was to be filed.
had forgotten.
:08 a.m. Another child (boy) to Math Center. Teacher began to
collect finished papers. Researcher reminded teacher
about dates on students’ work.
:10 a.m. Child left Math Center.
h rsda
9:00 a.m.
9:01 a.m.
9:07 a.m.
9:10 a.m.
9:21 a.m.
9:29 a.m.
329
b --T rd our h- r i ation
Schedule--Chalkboard:
8:40-9:05 Cursive writing
9:05-10:05 Reading
10:05-10:55 Language
10:55-11:30 Spelling test
Children working on a cursive handwriting sheet.
Long ditto explained: ”nouns" 2 sheets stapled
1. calf, calves ”plurals” { together
2. thief, thieves
, , Comp. ed. teacher took them
(Mrs. ).
"This a.m. we’re going to spend some time reading those
stories that you wrote yesterday. He’ll have a ”Shar-
ing Time."
Cursive ditto #1
Lang. ditto sheet #2
Writing ditto sheet #4
Paragraph ditto sheet #3
Three students returned to classroom.
Teacher continuing to circulate around the room,
helping children with ditto sheet assignments.
APPENDIX M
BUSY BOOK
330
APPENDIX N
Aa TO 22 FACSIMILE
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Beferenees.§ited
Adams, Anne H.: Johnson, Mary 8.: and Connors, Judith M.
augsess_in_Kindergarten_Bgaging_and_flritingi__1he
Readiness_sonsent_ef_the_£uture. Glenview, 111.:
Good Year Publishing Co., 1980.
Alexander, Clara Franklin. "Black English Dialect and the
Classroom Teacher." In Zapping Eotehtial: English
and Lan a e s or t e l c a er. Edited by
Charlotte K. Brooks. Urbana, 111.: National Council
of Teachers of English, 1985.
Ames, Louise Bates; Gillespie, Clyde; Haines, Jacqueline:
and 119, Frances L. Ihe Gesel; Lnstitute's Chitd
From One to Six: Eyaluatihg the gehavior of the Ere-
§chool Child. New York: Harper & Row, 1979.
Applebee, A. N. "Writing in the Secondary School:
English and the Content Areas." Research Report No.
21. Urbana, 111.: National Council of Teachers of
English, 1981. -
Ascher, Carol. "Writing Instruction for Dialectically
Different Youths." Fact Sheet No. 8. New York:
Columbia University, ERIC/CUE, January 1982.
Barnitz, John G. "Black English and Other Dialects:
Sociolinguistic Implications for Reading Instruc-
tion." Ihe_Beading;Ieasher (April 1980): 779-786-
Bereiter. 0-. and Englemann. 8- Isashins_ni§adxantased
hildr t e es . Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1966.
Bissex, Glenda L. ' d s
ehg_3eeg. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University
Press, 1980.
. ”Watching Young Writers." In Obsegyihg the
Lenghage Learnen. Edited by Angela Jaggar and M.
Trika Smith-Burke. Newark, Del.: International
Reading Association, 1985.
332
333
Britton, James: Burgess, Tony; Martin, Nancy; McLeod,
Alex: and Rosen, Harold. e e W ' 'n
Ahilitieet_11;1§. London: Macmillan Education,
1975. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 144
049)
Brookover, Wilbur: Beamer, Lawrence: Efthim, Helen:
Hathaway, Douglas: Lezotte, Lawrence: Miller,
Stephen: Passalacqua, Joseph: and Tornatsky, Louis.
Qgeatinq Effective Schoots: Ah Inservice Program :0;
n ' o ' ' a ' t.
Holmes Beach, Fla.: Learning Publications, 1982.
Brooks, Charlotte K., ed. a ° 5
WW- Urbana. 111.:
National Council of Teachers of English, 1985.
Burrows, Alvina Trent, and Lundsteen, Sara. "Is Outer
Stimulation a Route to Inner Motivation?" In Help
0 he e o W ' C 3 ° N w ' ec-
tion in Reseezch. Edited by Sara W. Lundsteen.
Urbana, 111.: National Council of Teachers of
English, 1976.
Calkins, Lucy McCormick. ' W ' .
Portsmouth, N.H.: Heinemann Educational Books, 1986.
Carlson. Ruth Kearney- WM
01' 0.7". __°! - ' D‘ ‘ Com-1 -. W ' 1° ; _‘V'-
ties. New York: Teachers College Press, Columbia
University, 1970.
Cianciolo, Patricia Jean. Pictuze Bogks to; thtgzeh.
2nd ed. Chicago: American Library Association,
1981.
Clark, Christopher M.: Florio, Susan: Elmore, Janis L.;
Martin, S. June: Maxwell, Rhoda J.: and Methany,
William. Uhderstehding Whiting in School: A
sc ' 'v ud W 'n st '
Igo Clessggo 5. Research Series No. 104. East
Lansing: Institute for Research on Teaching,
Michigan State University, February 1982.
Clay, Marie M. flhet_nig_1_flzitez Exeter, N.H.:
Heinemann Educational Books, 1975.
Cooper, R. L. "The Ability of Deaf and Hearing Children
to Apply Morphological Rules.” Ph.D. dissertation,
Columbia University, 1965.
334
Darnell, William. ”Teaching Writing Skills to Dialecti-
cally Different Students." 0 e a-
tion 43 (December 1974): 329-31.
Davis, Zephaniah T. ”Effects of Time-of—Day Instruction on
Beginning Reading Achievement.” lgg:nel_gf_zggge;
tign_l_3e§eezgh 80 (January/February 1987): 138-40.
Dillard, J. L. lac s : ts '8 nd a e in
the_uhiteg_§tgte§. New York: Random House, 1972.
Edmonds, Ronald R. "Some Schools Work and More Can."
£221§l_2211£Y 9 (1979): 23-32-
Edwards, Walter F. "Inner City English." In Ieppihg
ent'a ° '5
Lee;h_;. Edited by Charlotte K. Brooks. Urbana,
111.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1985.
Farr, Marcia. "Growth in Young Children: What We Are
Learning From Research." In Speaking and Whitihg,
- ° 5 ' ew esea
Urbana, 111.: National Council of Teachers of
English, 1984.
, and Daniels, Harvey. e 'v rsi a d
W ° 'n st . Urbana, 111.: National Council
of Teachers of English, 1986.
Ferreiro, Emilia. "The Relationship Between Oral and ,
Written Language: The Children's Viewpoints." In
1 an ' t n e D ve es :
Im2a2t_2n_the_§cheels- Urbana. 111.: National
Council of Teachers of English, 1982.
Fitzgerald, Sheila. "Oral Language and Beginning to Read:
Some Current Views." Unpublished article, Michigan
State University, n.d.
Good. Carter V- Dictionar2_ef_zdusatign- 3rd ed. New
York: McGraw-Hill, 1973.
Graves, Donald H. "Children's Writing: Research Direc-
tions and Hypotheses Based Upon an Examination of the
Writing Processes of Seven Year Old Children." Ed.D.
dissertation, State University of New York at
Buffalo, 1973.
335
. "An Examination of the Writing Processes of
Seven Year Old Children." Report from Graves’s doc-
toral dissertation. Buffalo: State University of
New York, 1973.
. ”We Won't Let Them Write." .LQDQEQQ§_AI£§ 55
(May 1978): 635-40.
Exeter, N.H.: Heinemann Educational Books, 1983.
Harste, Jerome: Burke, Carolyn: and Woodward, Virginia.
WW- Portsmouth
N.H.: Heinemann Educational Books, 1984.
Haussler, Myra M. "A Young Child's Developing Concepts of
Print." In Obsetgihg the Lenggage Leatnet. Edited
by Angela Jaggar and M. Trika Smith-Burke. Newark,
Del.: International Reading Association, 1985.
Heider, F. K., and Heider, G. M. "A Comparison of Sen-
tence Structure of Deaf and Hearing Children." Psy-
gholggicel Monogtephs 52 (1940): 42-103.
Hildreth, G. "Developmental Sequences in Name Writing."
thlg Qevetopment 7 (1936): 291-302.
Hillocks, George, Jr. Beseatch 9n Whitteh Cohpgsitioh:
WW- Urbana. 111.: ERIC
Clearinghouse on Reading and Communication Skills,
1986.
. "What Works in Teaching Composition: A Meta-
analysis of Experimental Treatment Studies." Ameri-
can Jghthel gt Edgeetign (November 1984): 133-70.
Holbrook, Hilary Taylor. "Qualities of Effective Writing
Programs." Urbana, 111.: ERIC Clearinghouse on
Reading and Communication Skills and National Council
of Teachers of English, 1984.
Huenecke, Dorothy. "Curriculum in the Language Arts." In
W . Edited by John
Warren Stewig. Columbus, Ohio: Charles E. Merrill,
1974.
Isaac, Stephen, and Michael, William B. fighghggk_in
ese d a u . 2nd ed. San Diego, Calif.:
Edits Publishers, 1981.
336
Johnson, Helen M. "Tips for Language Teaching: Teacher
Attitude and Ghetto Language." In Tapping Potentiel:
English ehd Lengpage Arts to; the hlack Leathe .
Edited by Charlotte R. Brooks. Urbana, 111.:
National Council of Teachers of English, 1985.
King, Margaret, and Karlsen, Alfred L. o - a st
Framework for the Analysis pt Egueetional Etogtams
fpt_fileeh_ghllgzeh. Palo Alto, Calif.: R & L
Research Associates, 1982.
King, Martha L., and Rentel, Victor. "Toward a Theory of
Early Writing Development.” W
pj_£pglleh 13 (October 1979): 243-53.
LabOV. William. W
e la E s Ve ac . Philadelphia: Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania Press, 1972. '
. The Study 0; Nohstehdezg Epgli h. Urbana,
111.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1968.
Lezotte, Lawrence. 0 cs ctus or ov a
Egpeetipp. East Lansing: Michigan State University,
July 1979.
Lundsteen, Sara W. Help fig; the Ieachep pf Whittep Compo-
t'o ° ew ' c 'ons ' ese . Urbana, 111.:
ERIC Clearinghouse on Reading and Communication
Skills, 1986.
. Listening; Its Ippeet at All Levels pp Eeeding
ehd the Other Lengpage Atts. Urbana, 111.: ERIC
Clearinghouse on Reading and Communication Skills and
the National Council of Teachers of English, 1979.
Markham, Lynda R. "De Dog and De Cat: Assisting Speakers
of Black English as They Begin to Write." Xeppg
ghllgzen (May 1984): 15-24.
Maybury, B. "Creative Writing for Juniors." Beyiep_pt
m i d 's d o o .
Urbana, 111.: ERIC Clearinghouse on Reading and
Communication Skills, 1976.
Mellon, John. "Language Competence." In Ihe_hetppe_epg
WW- Edited by
Charles Cooper. Urbana, 111.: National Council of
Teachers of English, 1981. (ERIC Document Reproduc-
tion Service No. ED 203 369)
337
Michigan Department of Education and the Michigan Council
of Teachers of English. Eeeehtlel Qpels and ijee-
tixe§_fer_flritingi_lez- Lansing: Michigan Depart-
ment of Education, 1985.
Michigan Educational Assessment Program (MEAP). Writing
Educatipp lntezppetive Repptt. Lansing: Michigan
State Board of Education, 1983.
Moffett, James. Ieachihg the Univetee pt lecoutse.
Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1983.
. and Wagner. Betty Jans- Studentzgentered
.Language_Arts_and_BeadingI_K:131__A_Handbook_fer
Ieeehete. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1983.
Morine, Harold, and Morine, Greta. L_Etimez_tp:_the
Ippetzglty_§ehppl. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1970.
Murray. Donald M. A_Eriter_Teaches_Eriting. Boston:
Houghton-Mifflin, 1985.
National Assessment of Educational Progress. filghllghte
s- W ' 'n h' m -7 . Denver,
Col.: Education Commission of the States, 1981.
. ' ' v - : ts e
' a 'o a W ' s e sm (Vols. 1-3). Wash-
ington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1981.
National Council of Teachers of English. fitepdezg§_tep
s' s W ' o . Urbana, 111.:
Author, March 1979.
- Teaghing_Q2nn2siti2n1__a_£2§ition_§tatemento
Urbana, 111.: Author, n.d.
, Commission on Composition. "Composition: A
Position Statement.” Elepepte:y_fipglleh (February
1975): 194-96.
Perl, Sandra, and Wilson, Nancy. Thtppgh Ieecheps' Eyes:
2ortraits_of_Eriting_1ea2her§_at_Nork- Portsmouth.
N.H.: Heinemann Educational Books, 1986.
Perrin. Porter G- Beferen2e_Handbook_2f_§rannar_and_n§age
aA . on g- - ' 0‘ an. 12‘. 0 1° ,,1.
New York: Wm. Morrow & Co., 1972.
Ratliff, J. D. ”I Am Joe’s Ear.” Beege:;e_flige§t
(October 1971): 131-34.
338
Read, Charles. "Pre-School Children's Knowledge of
English Phonology-" Harxard_Eduoation_Bexiex 41
(1971): 1-34.
Riessman, Frank. Ihe_1ppep;§1ty_ghilg. New York: Harper
8 ROW, 1976.
Sanders, Arlette. ”Learning Logs: A Communication Strat-
egy for All Subject Areas." Educational_Leadership
42 (February 1985): 7.
Sax, Gilbert. Enniri2a1_I2undations_of_ndusational
Reseateh. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall,
1968. '
Scollen, Ron, and Scollen, B. K. Suzanne. "The Literate
Two-Year-Old: The Fictionalization of the Self." In
ar 've 'te a ' t ethn'c uni-
eetion. Norwood, N.J.: Ablex, 1981.
Scott, Jerrie Cobb. "The King Case: Implications for
Educators." In Iapplng Potential: English and
ua e rts or the lac a . Edited by
Charlotte K. Brooks. Urbana, 111.: National Council
of Teachers of English, 1985.
Shuy, Roger W. lecoveting Ametican Dialects. Urbana,
111.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1967.
Smith, Vernon H. "Teaching Beginning Writing vs. Nurtur-
ing Beginning Writers." September 1984. (ERIC Docu-
ment Reproduction Service No. 254 847)
Smitherman. Geneva. ed. B1a2k_English_and_the_fidusation
pt Black Childteh and Xouth: Proceedings pt the
Nat' na v one 05' h Kin ec s on.
Detroit: Wayne State University Press, 1981.
. a a e r ' S unds o u .
New York: Harper 8 Row, 1975.
. ' e
Apetiee. Detroit: Wayne State University Press,
1977.
. "What Go Round Come Round.” In Iepplpg_£ptep;
a ° s d La 8 e B c
Leetpep. Edited by Charlotte K. Brooks. Urbana,
111.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1985.
339
Sparks, J. E. White to: Epwe; (With Enchizigioh). Los
Angeles: Communication Associates, 1982.
Steffenson, Margaret S. e' n eman e s'd-
ed: e de c on Children Ac irin l
Ehglish Vernaeulap. Technical Report No. 82.
Champaign: Center for the Study of Reading, Univer-
sity of Illinois, March 1978.
Stewig, John Warren, ed. Egploting Lengpage With ghil-
gtep. Columbus, Ohio: Charles E. Merrill, 1974.
Sutherland, Zena: Monson, Dianne L.: and Arbuthnot, May
Hill. thldpeh and Books. 6th ed. Glenview, 111.:
Scott, Foresman, and Co., 1981.
Thaiss . Christopher. WW1;
MW. Urbano. Ill-= ERIC/RC8 and
the National Council of Teachers of English, 1986.
Tchudi, Stephen N., and Tchudi, Susan J. Ieeehipg_flpitipg
o . Washing-
ton, D.C.: National Education Association, 1983.
Tiedt, Iris M. Wary
Clesstoom. Urbana, 111.: ERIC Clearinghouse on
Reading and Communication Skills and National Council
of Teachers of English, 1975.
Turner, Darwin T. "Black Students, Language, and Class-
room Teachers . " MW
e s e Black ar . Edited by
Charlotte K. Brooks. Urbana, 111.: National Council
of Teachers of English, 1985.
Tway, Eileen. ' W ti t e h .
Urbana, 111.: ERIC Clearinghouse on Reading and Com-
munication Skills and National Council of Teachers of
English, 1984.
Van Dalen. Deobold 8- WWW;-
4th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1979.
Wagner, Betty Jane. "Integrating the Language Arts."
Lepgpege_Att§ 62 (September 1985): 557-60.
Wheeler, M. E. "Untutored Acquisition of Writing Skill."
Ph.D. dissertation, Cornell University, 1971.
340
W
Baratz, Joan C., and Shuy, Roger W., eds. a ' ac
thlgtep_tp_3eeg. Washington, D.C.: Center for
Applied Linguistics, 1969.
Barnhart, Clarence L., and Barnhart, Robert K. Ihe_flptlg
ngk_nietippezy (Vols. 1 and 2). Chicago: Field
Enterprises Educational Corporation, 1976.
Beeker, Ruth. "Introducing the Writing Process: New
Procedures, New Expectations." 1981. (ERIC Document
Reproduction Service, ED 252 853)
Behr, George, and Bachelor, Barry. "Identifying Effective
Schools: A Case Study Involving Black Racially
Isolated Minority Schools and Instructional Accomp-
lishment Information Systems." July 20, 1981. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service, ED 252 627)
Blum, Virgil C. "Minority Families Sacrifice for Quality
Education." April 24, 1984. (ERIC Document Repro-
duction Service, ED 249 332)
Boyer. E. L. W
tien_ih_Ame;iee. New York: Harper 8 Row, 1983.
BrOPhY. Jere - W
t Achiev : lica s f r
Ipsttpction ot Qhapte: I Stpdente. East Lansing:
Institute for Research on Teaching, Michigan State
University, 1987.
. "Successful Strategies for Teaching the Inner-
City Child-" Reprinted in W
Egpeetiph. Edited by K. Ryan and J. Cooper. Boston:
Houghton-Mifflin, 1984.
Calkins, Lucy McCormick. 5 ° e
Whamm- Exeter. N.H.:
Heinemann Educational Books, 1983.
Cipfl, Joseph J. "How to Evaluate Your School’s Instruc-
tional Program.” 1984. (ERIC Document Reproduction
Service No. ED 247 647)
341
Clark, Christopher M., and Florio, Susan, with Elmore,
Janis L.: Martin, June: and Maxwell, Rhoda. "Under-
standing Writing Instruction: Issues on Theory and
Method." In ese 0 W ’ : Pr' c'
nethpg_. Edited by Peter Masenthal, Lynne Tamor, and
Sean A. Walinsky. New York: Longman, 1983.
Costa, Arthur L., ed. 5: s ce ook
Wing Alexandra. W- Va. : ASCD.
1985.
Cusick, Philip A. o a ' s a ch
Methods in Educatipp. Conference Series No. 2. East
Lansing: Institute for Research on Teaching, Michi-
gan State University, January 1978.
Darling-Hammond, Linda. "Equality and Excellence: The
Educational Status of Black Americans." 1985.
(ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 256 844)
Donaldson, Margaret. ghilgtep;e_uipge. London: Fontana
Paperbacks, 1978.
Edgerton, Sally Mulder. "An Ethnographic Study of the Fac-
tors Affecting Student, Parent, and Staff Adjustments
Created by the Closing of an Elementary School."
Ph.D. dissertation, Michigan State University, 1986.
Erickson. Frederick. Wm
WM. Occasional Paper
No. 15. East Lansing: Institute for Research on.
Teaching, Michigan State University, March 1979.
. d s V ' ' udies
pt Qlesszppm Activity. Occasional Paper No. 11.
East Lansing: Institute for Research on Teaching,
Michigan State University, March 1979.
. t e ns 0 's d 'v ° e
Feetures of hnthtopologicel Apptpaches to the Study of
Educatiph. Occasional Paper No. 22. East Lansing:
Institute for Research on Teaching, Michigan State
University, June 1979.
Occasional Paper No. 81. East Lansing: Institute
for Research on Teaching, Michigan State University,
February 1979.
342
: Florio, Susan; and Buschman, James. Eieldwptk
in Educational Research. Occasional Paper No. 36.
East Lansing: Institute for Research on Teaching,
Michigan State University, August 1980.
Escoe, Adrienne. "Writing a Writing Assessment: Saying
What You Want to Say Isn't as Simple as It Seems."
December 12, 1982. (ERIC Document Reproduction Serv-
ice No. ED 249 507)
"Ethnography and the English Classroom." The English
Becorg (New York State English Council) 34,4 (1983).
Farr, Marcia. "Language, Culture, and Writing: Sociolin-
guistic Foundations of Research on Writing." Beyiey
pt Reseateh in Edneetipn (AERA/RRE) 13 (1986): 195-
223.
Ferreiro, Emilia, and Tebernsky, Ann. Lite;egy_§etpte
Sehgpling. Exteter, N.H.: Heinemann Educational
Books, 1982.
Fleming, James. "Review of Development in Children's
Language and Composition." In Help for the Ieachet
of Written Com osition: ew ’ ecti 5 search.
Edited by Sara W. Lundsteen. Urbana, 111.: National
Conference on Research in English, 1976.
Florio, Susan, and Clark, Christopher M. ”What Is Writing
For? Writing in the First Weeks of School in a ,
Second-Third Grade Classroom.” In Qpnnnnieeting_in
the Clessroon. Edited by Louise Cherry-Wilkinson.
New York: Academic Press, 1982.
Florio-Ruane, Susan. "What's So Hard About Writing? The
Issues for Teachers and Students." The_Elenente;y
fiehppl_gpntnel 84 (September 1983): 93-99.
Fordham, Signithia. "Cultural Inversion and Black Chil-
dren’s School Performance." December 1982. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service No. ED 249 319)
Fowler, Elaine D. "Practice and Feedback in Elementary
School Writing Instruction.” 1978. (ERIC Document
Reproduction Service No. ED 247 598)
Gender, Patricia Ann. "A Writing Seminar for Speakers of
Black English." Ph.D. dissertation, The University
of New Mexico, 1972.
343
Gill, Wanda E. "Education and the Black Family." June 22,
1985. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 259
062)
Glaser, Barney G., and Strauss, Anselm L. The Qiscpvety
d ° ' 'v
Reseeteh. Chicago: Aldine, 1967.
Goodlad. John I. A_E1ace_Qa11ed_§chooli__£rosnects_for
the_£ntnte. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1984. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service No. ED 236 137)
Goodman, Kenneth. "Reading as a Psycholinguistic Guessing L
Game." J2urnal_of_8eading_§eecialist 6 (1967)=126-
35.
Goodman, Kenneth, and Goodman, Yetta. "Reading and
Writing Relationships: Pragmatic Functions."
Language_Arts so (May 1983): $58-67. L
Graves, Donald H., and Stuart, Virginia. Wtite_£tpn_the
t1. 1" I. O 91 2': 3 , 1' 1‘! .t 0
New York: E. P. Dutton, 1985.
Hailey, J. "Teaching Writing K-8." Berkeley: University
of California, n.d. (ERIC Document Reproduction Serv-
ice NO. ED 246 439)
Haley-James, Shirley, ed. ' W
Qtegee_l;§. Urbana, 111.: National Council of
Teachers of English, 1981.
Heath, Shirley Brice. W W ' n '
W o 8 ms. Cambridge:
University of Cambridge, 1983.
Henderson, Phyllis A. "Considerations for Planning the
Educational Program of Young Afro-American Children."
March 1984. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.
ED 251 218)
Holliday, Bertha Garrett. ”Black Children’s Behavioral
Skills in the Home and School Setting: A Historical
and Research Review With Policy Implications."
September 1984. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service,
ED 249 341)
344
Jacobson, Karen H., and Horner, Annette M. "Notes to
Teachers of Basic Writing: An Instructor's Guide-
book." September 30, 1983. (ERIC Document Reproduc-
tion Service No. ED 250 035)
Jacoby, Adrienne A. "An Investigation of the Historical
Backgrounds of Elementary School Classroom Teachers
Concerning Written Composition and Its Effects on
Curriculum Decisions and Teaching Concerning Writing:
A Case Study." Ed.D. dissertation, The University of
Pennsylvania, 1983.
Jaggar, Angela, and Smith-Burke, M. Trika. Qheetying_the
Lengnege_teeznep. Newark, Del.: International Read-
ing Association, 1985.
Jones, Nancy Lyn. "Case Study, Course Study: A Contextu-
alized Investigation of a Writing Course." 1982.
(ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 249 487)
Kelly, Patricia P., and Small, Robert C., Jr., eds. "What
We Know About the Teaching of Writing." 1985. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service No. ED 257 118/ED 253
870.
Kimmel, Margaret Mary, and Segel, Elizabeth. Ep;_3eeging
Qnt_Lppgl New York: Dell, 1984.
King, Martha L., and Rentel, Victor. pr_ghilgten_Leetn
tp Write; A Lgngituginal Stngy. Final Report to the
National Institute of Education. 1981. (ERIC Docu-
ment Reproduction Service No. ED 213 050)
Lemme. Linda Leonard. MW
MW Washington.
D.C.: Acropolic Books, 1984.
Landsburg, David, and Witt, Stanley. ”Writing Across the
Curriculum: One Small Step." April 20, 1984. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service No. ED 248 922)
Martin, June M. "Curriculum of Middle School: A Descrip-
tive Study of the Teaching of Writing." Ph.D. dis-
sertation, Michigan State University, 1984.
Mellon, John. "Language Competence." In
WWW- Edited by
Charles Cooper. Urbana, 111.: National Council of
Teachers of English, 1981. (ERIC Document Reproduc-
tion Service No. ED 203 369)
345
Mier, Margaret. "Class Size and Writing Instruction."
1984. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 250
689)
Moss, R. Kay. "Transactions Among Teachers and Children:
Teachers’ Instruction and the Writing Processes of
Kindergarten Children." 1985. (ERIC Document Repro-
duction Service No. ED 258 188)
Murray, Donald. fltite_tp_Leepn. New York: Holt,
Rinehart, and Winston, 1984.
Myers, John W. "Writing to Learn Across the Curriculum."
1984. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 248
532)
National Black Child Development Institute. "Excellence
and Equity, Quality and Inequality: A Report on
Civil Rights, Education, and Black Children." June
1983. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 257
907)
National Commission on Excellence in Education. A_Netipn
at_B1ski__Tbe_Im2eIat12e_for_Educat19na1_Eeforn-
Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1983.
New York City Board of Education. "Writing Every Day Gen-
erates Excellence: A Manual for the Teaching of
Writing." 1981. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service
No. ED 283 870)
New York State Education Department. "Helping Student
Writers, Grades K-6." 1983. (ERIC Document Repro-
duction Service No. ED 247 606)
Noonan-Wagner, Desley. "Black Writers in the Classroom:
A Question of Language Experience, Not Grammar.”
March 1980. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.
ED 189 599)
Ogbu, John U. ”Schooling in the Ghetto: An Ecological
Perspective on Community and Home Influences.”
January 1981. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service
No. ED 252 270)
Orchard, Diane. "A Descriptive Study of a Primary School
Teacher Inservice Support System for Writing Instruc-
tion." Ph.D. dissertation, Michigan State Univer-
sity, 1984.
346
Papert, Seymour. ' d ° i m s
Epyetjnl_1gee§. New York: Basic Books, 1980.
Penning, Marjorie Jean. "The Relationship of Text Struc-
ture Manipulations, Discourse Type and Language Abil-
ity to Question, Answers and Free Recall Responses in
Learning Disabled Children." Ph.D. dissertation,
Michigan State University, 1986.
Perilla, Alejandro, and Orum, Lori S. "Community Access
to Information on Education: A Case Study on the
Education Black Grant.” September 1984. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service No. ED 251 535)
Pestroskey, Anthony R., and Bartholomew, David. The
Teaching of Writing: Eighty-Eitth Yeatbooh pf the
x- 01;. .0 _‘ 0. 1' -0. 0.- - on '11 _.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986.
Pradt, Gordon M., and Mayher, John S. "Reinvigorating
Learning Through Writing-” Educationa1_Leader§hin 42
(February 1985): 4-8.
Rees, David. "On Katherine Patterson, Alexander Pope,
Myself, and Some Others.” d 's i e a ur n
Beneetipn 14 (1983): 160-69.
Robinson. H. Alan. ed. Beading_and_Eriting_Instructien_in
the United States: Histonical Trenge. Newark, Del.:
International Reading Association, 1977.
Ruckner, Gary H. "Regular Writing Practice: Strategies
for Implementation and Evaluation." 1977. (ERIC
Document Reproduction Service No. ED 252 849)
Scott, Hugh J. "A Call for Greater Black Consciousness
and Professionalism in the Pursuit of Cultural and
Academic Excellence for Afro-Americans." May 4,
1985. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 256
861)
Shaughnessy, Mina P. ta ' s: .
h ac o ' W ' ' . New York: Oxford
University Press, 1977.
347
. "Some Needed Research on Writing." Qpllege
Qoneosition.§9mnunications (December 1977): 317-20-
Silberman, Charles E. 's's ' ss om:
Eenaking_9f_Anerican_Education. New York: Random
House, 1970.
Sizer. Theodore R. 89ra2eLs_s9mpromise1__1he_211emna_ef
the_American_High_§ch991- Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
1984.
Skokie School District 68, Illinois. "K-8 Writing Skills
Curriculum." October 1982. (ERIC Document Reproduc-
tion Service No. ED 258 211)
Smith, Frank. Eeeeye_1ntp_Litepeey. Exeter, N.H.:
Heinemann Educational Books, 1983.
. Eriting_and_the_flriter- New York: Holt.
Rinehart, and Winston, 1982.
Smitherman, Geneva, and Wright, Sandra. "Black Student
Writers, Storks and Families Places: What Can We
Learn From the National Assessment of Education
Progress?" November 1984. (ERIC Document Reproduc-
tion Service No. ED 259 :328)
Sowell. Thomas. Edugati2n1__Aesunntions_Yersu§_nistory-
Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1986.
Spindler. George. ed. D9ing_the_Einnegranhy_9f_§2n9911ngi
Educati2na1_Anthrenelogy_in_Action. New York: Holt.
Rinehart, and Winston, 1982.
Stiles, Ehann Elizabeth Reynolds. "A Case Study of Reme-
dial Writers in Selected Two-Year Colleges in East
Tennessee." Ed.D. dissertation, The University of
Tennessee, 1976.
Stotsky, Sandra. "Research on Reading/Writing Relation-
ships: A Synthesis and Suggested Directions." (Len;
gnege_hpte 60 (May 1983): 581-89.
Strickland, Robbie Wells. "A Case Study Examination of
Reader Awareness and the Composing Process of Under-
graduate Business Students." Ed.D. dissertation, The
University of Georgia, 1984.
Taylor. Denny- Eani1y_Litera2y1__Young_£bildren_Learning
tp_3eeg_eng_flpite. Portsmouth, N.H.: Heinemann
Educational Books, 1983.
348
Tchudi, Stephen, and Yates, Joanne. Teeching Writing in
o 3 ° 0 ' . Washington,
D.C.: National Education Association, 1983.
Temple, Charles A.: Nathan, Potts G.: and Burris, Nancy A.
Be 'nn'n W n : ractic Guide
un Chi d's 'scov ' ' ou t e c
' S e 'n m ‘ e . Boston:
Allyn and Bacon, 1982.
Thaiss, Christopher J., and Suhr, Charles, eds. e in
end Writing 5- 12; gleeetppn fittetegiee end the New
Beeeeteh. Urbana, 111.: National Council of Teach-
ers of English, 1984.
Tiedt, Sidney W., and Tiedt, Iris M. Lengpege_ntte
Actiyities_for_the_£1assreom. Boston: Allyn and
Bacon, 1978.
TraverS. Robert E- An_Introduction.t2.£ducationa1
Beseet h. Toronto: Macmillan, 1969.
Turhill, Jane, ed. 0 e W c Wr i 1
Rozelle, N.S.W., Australia: Primary English Teaching
Association, 1982.
Tway, Eileen. W ' s a ' : -six We 0
Qonnect. Urbana, 111.: ERIC Clearinghouse on
Reading and Communication Skills and the National
Council of Teachers of English, 1985.
Wilson, Stephen. ”The Use of Ethnographic Techniques in
Educational Research." Beyiew_of_Educationa1
Reeeeteh 47 (Winter 1977): 245- 65.
Young, Roberta. "How to Teach Writing Without Knowing the
Meaning of AWK." 1985. (ERIC Document Reproduction
Service No. ED 254 853)
Zinsser, William. W W : ui to
Writing_flpn£igtipn. New York: Harper and Row, 1980.